Samsung Printer SCX 6X45 User Guide

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
© 2006 Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. All rights reserved.  
This user’s guide is provided for information purposes only. All information included herein is subject to change without notice. Samsung Electronics is not  
responsible for any direct or indirect damages, arising from or related to use of this user’s guide.  
• SCX-6345N is model name of Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd.  
• Samsung and Samsung logo are trademarks of Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd.  
• PCL and PCL 6 are trademarks of Hewlett-Packard company.  
• Microsoft, Windows and Windows NT are either registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation.  
• PostScript 3 is a trademark of Adobe System, Inc.  
• UFST® and MicroType™ are registered trademarks of Monotype Imaging Inc.  
• TrueType, LaserWriter and Macintosh are trademarks of Apple Computer, Inc.  
• All other brand or product names are trademarks of their respective companies or organizations.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Safety and Regulatory Information ..............................................................................................................................ii  
Front view ........................................................................................................................................................... 1.2  
Job Status button ................................................................................................................................................ 1.5  
Power Saver button ............................................................................................................................................ 1.5  
Understanding the Status LED ................................................................................................................................ 1.6  
Status .................................................................................................................................................................. 1.6  
3. Getting Started  
Setting up the hardware .......................................................................................................................................... 3.1  
Setting up the network ............................................................................................................................................ 3.1  
Supported operating systems ............................................................................................................................. 3.2  
Configuring network protocol via the machine .................................................................................................... 3.2  
Installing the software ............................................................................................................................................. 3.2  
Machine's basic settings ......................................................................................................................................... 3.3  
Setting the authentication password ................................................................................................................... 3.3  
Setting the date and time .................................................................................................................................... 3.4  
Changing the display language .......................................................................................................................... 3.4  
Setting job timeout .............................................................................................................................................. 3.4  
Using energy saving feature ............................................................................................................................... 3.4  
Setting the default tray and paper ....................................................................................................................... 3.5  
Changing the default settings ............................................................................................................................. 3.5  
Understanding the keyboard ................................................................................................................................... 3.5  
4. Loading originals and print media  
Loading originals ..................................................................................................................................................... 4.1  
On the scanner glass .......................................................................................................................................... 4.1  
In the DADF ........................................................................................................................................................ 4.1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Image tab ............................................................................................................................................................ 5.1  
Changing the settings for each copy ....................................................................................................................... 5.2  
6. Faxing (Optional)  
Preparing to fax ....................................................................................................................................................... 6.1  
Understanding the Fax screen ................................................................................................................................ 6.1  
Basic tab ............................................................................................................................................................. 6.1  
Advanced tab ...................................................................................................................................................... 6.1  
Image tab ............................................................................................................................................................ 6.2  
Sending a fax .......................................................................................................................................................... 6.2  
Setting the fax header ......................................................................................................................................... 6.2  
Sending a fax ...................................................................................................................................................... 6.2  
Sending a fax manually (On Hook Dial) .............................................................................................................. 6.3  
Automatic resending ........................................................................................................................................... 6.3  
Redialing the last number ................................................................................................................................... 6.3  
Delaying a fax transmission ................................................................................................................................ 6.3  
Sending a priority fax .......................................................................................................................................... 6.4  
Receiving a fax ........................................................................................................................................................ 6.4  
Changing the receive modes .............................................................................................................................. 6.4  
Receiving manually in Telephone mode ............................................................................................................. 6.4  
Receiving automatically in Answering Machine/Fax mode ................................................................................. 6.4  
Receiving faxes manually using an extension telephone ................................................................................... 6.4  
Receiving in secure receiving mode ................................................................................................................... 6.5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Receiving faxes in memory ................................................................................................................................. 6.5  
Adjusting the document settings ............................................................................................................................. 6.5  
Duplex ................................................................................................................................................................. 6.5  
Storing individual fax numbers (Speed Dial No.) ................................................................................................ 6.6  
Image tab ............................................................................................................................................................ 7.2  
Output tab ........................................................................................................................................................... 7.2  
Scanning originals and sending through email (Scan to Email) .............................................................................. 7.3  
Sending a scanned image to several destinations as an email attachment ....................................................... 7.3  
Storing email addresses ..................................................................................................................................... 7.3  
Entering email addresses by the address book .................................................................................................. 7.4  
Entering email addresses by the keyboard ......................................................................................................... 7.4  
Scanning originals and sending via Samsung Network Scan Manager (NetScan) ................................................. 7.5  
Preparation for network scanning ....................................................................................................................... 7.5  
Scanning and sending via NetScan .................................................................................................................... 7.5  
Scanning originals and sending via SMB/ FTP (Scan to Server) ............................................................................ 7.5  
Preparation for scanning to SMB/FTP ................................................................................................................ 7.5  
Scanning and sending to SMB/FTP server ......................................................................................................... 7.6  
Changing the scan feature settings ......................................................................................................................... 7.6  
Duplex ................................................................................................................................................................. 7.6  
Resolution ........................................................................................................................................................... 7.7  
Original Size ....................................................................................................................................................... 7.7  
Original Type ...................................................................................................................................................... 7.7  
Color Mode ......................................................................................................................................................... 7.7  
Darkness ............................................................................................................................................................. 7.8  
Erase Background .............................................................................................................................................. 7.8  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Scan Preset ........................................................................................................................................................ 7.8  
Network Setup ......................................................................................................................................................... 9.5  
Authentication ......................................................................................................................................................... 9.6  
Optional Service ...................................................................................................................................................... 9.6  
Remote Service ....................................................................................................................................................... 9.7  
Printing a report ....................................................................................................................................................... 9.7  
Cleaning the scan unit ...................................................................................................................................... 10.2  
Maintaining the cartridge ....................................................................................................................................... 10.3  
Replacing the toner cartridge ............................................................................................................................ 10.3  
Replacing the drum cartridge ............................................................................................................................ 10.4  
Maintenance Parts ................................................................................................................................................ 10.6  
Managing your machine from the website ............................................................................................................ 10.6  
11. Troubleshooting  
Clearing document jams ....................................................................................................................................... 11.1  
Misfeed of exiting paper .................................................................................................................................... 11.1  
Roller misfeed ................................................................................................................................................... 11.2  
Clearing paper jams .............................................................................................................................................. 11.2  
In the tray 1 ....................................................................................................................................................... 11.2  
In the optional tray ............................................................................................................................................ 11.3  
In the multi-purpose tray ................................................................................................................................... 11.5  
In the fuser area or around the toner cartridge ................................................................................................. 11.5  
In the paper exit area ........................................................................................................................................ 11.6  
In the duplex unit area ...................................................................................................................................... 11.6  
In the stacker (finisher) ..................................................................................................................................... 11.7  
Tips for avoiding paper jams ............................................................................................................................. 11.8  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Understanding display messages ......................................................................................................................... 11.8  
Copying problems ........................................................................................................................................... 11.18  
Scanning problems ......................................................................................................................................... 11.19  
Network Scan problems .................................................................................................................................. 11.19  
12. Ordering supplies and accessories  
Drum cartridge ...................................................................................................................................................... 12.1  
Accessories ........................................................................................................................................................... 12.1  
How to purchase ................................................................................................................................................... 12.2  
13. Installing accessories  
Precautions to take when installing accessories ................................................................................................... 13.1  
Installing a memory DIMM .................................................................................................................................... 13.1  
Activating the added memory in the PS printer properties ............................................................................... 13.2  
Replacing the Stapler ............................................................................................................................................ 13.2  
Enabling Fax feature after installing the fax option kit ........................................................................................... 13.3  
14. Specifications  
General specifications ........................................................................................................................................... 14.1  
Printer specifications ............................................................................................................................................. 14.1  
Copier specifications ............................................................................................................................................. 14.2  
Scanner specifications .......................................................................................................................................... 14.2  
Facsimile specifications (optional) ........................................................................................................................ 14.3  
Index  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
About this user’s guide  
Finding more information  
This user’s guide provides information about basic understanding of the  
machine as well as detailed explanation on each step during the actual  
usage. Both novice users and professional users can refer to this guide for  
installing and using the machine.  
You can find information for setting up and using your machine from the  
following resources, either as a print-out or onscreen.  
Quick Install  
Guide  
Provides information on setting up your  
machine and this requires that you follow  
the instructions in the guide to prepare the  
machine.  
This explanation is mainly based on the Microsoft Windows operating  
system.  
Some terms in this guide are used interchangeably, as below.  
• Document is synonymous with original.  
• Paper is synonymous with media, or print media.  
• The model name such as SCX-6345N is synonymous with the  
machine.  
Online User’s  
Guide  
Provides you with step-by-step  
instructions for using your machine’s full  
features, and contains information for  
maintaining your machine,  
troubleshooting, and installing  
accessories.  
The following table offers the conventions of this guide.  
Convention  
Description  
Example  
Copy Setup  
Bold  
Used for texts on the  
screen or actual prints on  
the machine.  
This user’s guide also contains Software  
section to provide you with information on  
how to print documents with your machine  
in various operating systems, and how to  
use the included software utilities.  
Note  
Note  
Used to provide  
The date format  
may differ from  
country to country.  
additional information or  
detailed specification of  
the machine function and  
feature.  
Network Printer  
User’s Guide  
Contained on the Network Utilities CD,  
this guide provides you with information on  
setting up and connecting your machine to  
a network.  
Caution  
Caution  
Used to give users  
information to protect the  
machine from possible  
mechanical damage or  
malfunction.  
Do not touch the  
green underside of  
the toner cartridge.  
Printer Driver  
Help  
Provides you with help information on  
printer driver properties and instructions  
for setting up the properties for printing. To  
access a printer driver help screen, click  
Help from the printer properties dialog  
box.  
a. pages per minute  
Footnote  
Used to provide more  
detailed information on  
certain words or a  
phrase.  
>
Used to show the steps  
of selecting or pressing  
items in order.  
Copy > the Advanced tab >  
Clone Copy  
The example means;  
press Copy from the  
Main screen, press the  
Advanced tab, and then  
press Clone Copy.  
Samsung website If you have Internet access, you can get  
help, support, printer drivers, manuals,  
and order information from the Samsung  
(Page 1.1)  
Used to guide users to  
the reference page for  
the additional detailed  
information.  
(Page 1.1)  
Note  
Items, features, options on the touch screen may differ between  
models depending on their configurations.  
i
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
               
• If the machine has been exposed to rain or water.  
Safety and Regulatory Information  
• If the machine does not operate properly after instructions have been  
followed.  
• If the machine has been dropped, or the cabinet appears damaged.  
• If the machine exhibits a sudden and distinct change in performance.  
Important Precautions and Safety Information  
When using this machine, these basic safety precautions should always be  
followed to reduce risk of fire, electric shock and injury to people:  
15 Adjust only those controls covered by the operating instructions.  
Improper adjustment of other controls may result in damage, and may  
require extensive work by a qualified service technician to restore the  
machine to normal operation.  
1
2
3
Read and understand all instructions.  
Use common sense whenever operating electrical appliances.  
Follow all warnings and instructions marked on the machine and in the  
literature accompanying the machine.  
16 Avoid using this machine during a lightning storm. There may be a  
remote risk of electric shock from lightning. If possible, unplug the AC  
power and telephone cord for the duration of the lightning storm.  
4
If an operating instruction appears to conflict with safety information,  
heed the safety information. You may have misunderstood the  
operating instruction. If you cannot resolve the conflict, contact your  
sales or service representative for assistance.  
17 The Power cord supplied with your machine should be used for safe  
operation. If you are using a cord which is longer than 2 m with 110 V  
machine, then it should be 16 AWG1 or bigger.  
5
Unplug the machine from the AC wall socket and/or telephone jack  
before cleaning. Do not use liquid or aerosol cleaners. Use only a damp  
cloth for cleaning.  
18 Use only No.26 AWG1 or larger telephone line cord.  
19 SAVE THESE INSTRUCTIONS.  
6
7
8
9
Do not place the machine on an unstable cart, stand or table. It may fall,  
causing serious damage.  
Laser Safety Statement  
The printer is certified in the U.S. to conform to the requirements of DHHS 21  
CFR, chapter 1 Subchapter J for Class I(1) laser products, and elsewhere is  
certified as a Class I laser product conforming to the requirements of IEC 825.  
Your machine should never be placed on, near or over a radiator,  
heater, air conditioner or ventilation duct.  
Do not allow anything to rest on the power. Do not locate your machine  
where the cords will be abused by persons walking on them.  
Class I laser products are not considered to be hazardous. The laser system  
and printer are designed so there is never any human access to laser  
radiation above a Class I level during normal operation, user maintenance or  
prescribed service condition.  
Do not overload wall outlets and extension cords. This can diminish  
performance, and may result in the risk of fire or electric shock.  
10 Do not allow pets to chew on the AC power, telephone or PC interface  
cords.  
WARNING  
Never operate or service the printer with the protective cover removed from  
Laser/Scanner assembly. The reflected beam, although invisible, can  
damage your eyes.  
11 Never push objects of any kind into the machine through case or  
cabinet openings. They may touch dangerous voltage points, creating a  
risk of fire or shock. Never spill liquid of any kind onto or into the  
machine.  
12 Your machine may have a heavy cover for optimal pressure on the  
document for the best scanning and/or faxing (usually the flatbed-type  
machine). In this case, replace the cover after placing document on the  
scan glass, by holding and moving it down slowly until it seats on its  
location.  
13 To reduce the risk of electric shock, do not disassemble the machine.  
Take it to a qualified service technician when repair work is required.  
Opening or removing covers may expose you to dangerous voltages or  
other risks. Incorrect reassembly could cause electric shock when the  
unit is subsequently used.  
14 Unplug the machine from the telephone jack, PC and AC wall outlet and  
refer servicing to qualified service personnel under the following  
conditions:  
• When any part of the power cord, plug or connecting cable is  
damaged or frayed.  
• If liquid has been spilled into the machine.  
1 AWG: American Wire Gauge  
ii  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
When using this product, these basic safety precautions should always be  
followed to reduce risk of fire, electric shock, and injury to persons:  
Recycling  
Please recycle or dispose of the packaging material for this  
product in an environmentally responsible manner.  
Correct Disposal of This Product (Waste Electrical  
& Electronic Equipment)  
(Applicable in the European Union and other European  
countries with separate collection systems)  
This marking shown on the product or its literature,  
indicates that it should not be disposed with other  
household wastes at the end of its working life. To prevent  
possible harm to the environment or human health from  
uncontrolled waste disposal, please separate this from  
other types of wastes and recycle it responsibly to promote  
the sustainable reuse of material resources.  
Household users should contact either the retailer where they purchased this  
product, or their local government office, for details of where and how they  
can take this item for environmentally safe recycling.  
Ozone Safety  
Business users should contact their supplier and check the terms and  
conditions of the purchase contract. This product should not be mixed with  
other commercial wastes for disposal.  
During normal operation, this machine produces ozone. The  
ozone produced does not present a hazard to the operator.  
However, it is advisable that the machine be operated in a  
well ventilated area.  
Radio Frequency Emissions  
If you need additional information about ozone, please  
request your nearest Samsung dealer.  
FCC Information to the User  
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to  
the following two conditions:  
Mercury Safety  
• This device may not cause harmful interference, and  
SCANNING AND DISPLAY LAMPS INSIDE THIS PRODUCT  
CONTAIN MERCURY AND MUST BE RECYCLED OR DISPOSED  
OF ACCORDING TO LOCAL, STATE OR FEDERAL LAWS. For  
details see lamprecycle.org, eiae.org, or call 1-800-Samsung  
• This device must accept any interference received, including  
interference that may cause undesired operation.  
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a  
Class A digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are  
designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a  
residential installation. This equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio  
frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the  
instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications.  
However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular  
installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or  
television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off  
and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or  
more of the following measures:  
California USA Only  
This Perchlorate warning applies only to primary CR (Manganese Dioxide) Lithium  
coin cells in the product sold or distributed ONLY in California USA.  
Perchlorate Material - special handling may apply.  
See www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate.  
Power Saver  
• Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.  
This printer contains advanced energy conservation technology that reduces  
power consumption when it is not in active use.  
• Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.  
• Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to  
which the receiver is connected.  
When the printer does not receive data for an extended period of time, power  
consumption is automatically lowered.  
• Consult the dealer or experienced radio TV technician for help.  
iii  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
order to assure proper service from the telephone company. In some cases,  
a sum of five may not be usable on your line. If any of your telephone  
equipment is not operating properly, you should immediately remove it from  
your telephone line, as it may cause harm to the telephone network.  
Caution:  
Change or modifications not expressly approved by the manufacturer  
responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to operate the  
equipment.  
WARNING:  
Canadian Radio Interference Regulations  
FCC Regulations state that changes or modifications to this equipment not  
expressly approved by the manufacturer could void the user’s authority to  
operate this equipment. In the event that terminal equipment causes harm to  
the telephone network, the telephone company should notify the customer  
that service may be stopped. However, where prior notice is impractical, the  
company may temporarily cease service, providing that they:  
This digital apparatus does not exceed the Class A limits for radio noise  
emissions from digital apparatus as set out in the interference-causing  
equipment standard entitled “Digital Apparatus”, ICES-003 of the Industry  
and Science Canada.  
Cet appareil numérique respecte les limites de bruits radioélectriques  
applicables aux appareils numériques de Classe A prescrites dans la norme  
sur le matériel brouilleur: “Appareils Numériques”, ICES-003 édictée par  
l’Industrie et Sciences Canada.  
a) promptly notify the customer.  
b) give the customer an opportunity to correct the equipment problem.  
c) inform the customer of the right to bring a complaint to the Federal  
Communication Commission pursuant to procedures set out in FCC Rules  
and Regulations Subpart E of Part 68.  
RFID (Radio Frequency Interface Device)  
RFID operation is subject to the following two conditions:(1) this device may  
not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference,  
including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.  
You should also know that:  
Your machine is not designed to be connected to a digital PBX system.  
• If you intend to use a computer modem or fax modem on the same phone  
line as your machine, you may experience transmission and reception  
problems with all the equipment. It is recommended that no other  
equipment, except for a regular telephone, share the line with your  
machine.  
Fax Branding  
The Telephone Consumer Protection Act of 1991 makes it unlawful for any  
person to use a computer or other electronic device to send any message via  
a telephone facsimile machine unless such message clearly contains in a  
margin at the top or bottom of each transmitted page or on the first page of  
the transmission the following information:  
• If your area experiences a high incidence of lightning or power surges, we  
recommend that you install surge protectors for both the power and the  
telephone lines. Surge protectors can be purchased from your dealer or  
telephone and electronic specialty stores.  
(1) the date and time of transmission  
(2) identification of either business, business entity or individual sending the  
message; and  
• When programming emergency numbers and/or making test calls to  
emergency numbers, use a non-emergency number to advise the  
emergency service dispatcher of your intentions. The dispatcher will give  
you further instructions on how to actually test the emergency number.  
(3) telephone number of either the sending machine, business, business  
entity or individual.  
The Telephone Company may make changes in its communications facilities,  
equipment operations or procedures where such action is reasonably  
required in the operation of its business and is not inconsistent with the rules  
and regulations in FCC Part 68. If such changes can be reasonably expected  
to render any customer terminal equipment incompatible with telephone  
company communications facilities, or require modification or alteration of  
such terminal equipment, or otherwise materially affect its use or  
• This machine may not be used on coin service or party lines.  
• This machine provides magnetic coupling to hearing aids.  
You may safely connect this equipment to the telephone network by  
means of a standard modular jack, USOC RJ-11C.  
Declaration of Conformity (European Countries)  
performance, the customer shall be given adequate notice in writing, to allow  
the customer an opportunity to maintain uninterrupted service.  
Approvals and Certifications  
The CE marking applied to this product symbolizes  
Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. Declaration of Conformity  
with the following applicable 93/68/EEC Directives of the  
European Union as of the dates indicated:  
Ringer Equivalence Number  
The Ringer Equivalence Number and FCC Registration Number for this  
machine may be found on the label located on the bottom or rear of the  
machine. In some instances you may need to provide these numbers to the  
telephone company.  
January 1, 1995: Council Directive 73/23/EEC Approximation of the laws of  
the member states related to low voltage equipment.  
The Ringer Equivalence Number (REN) is a measure of the electrical load  
placed on the telephone line, and is useful for determining whether you have  
“overloaded” the line. Installing several types of equipment on the same  
telephone line may result in problems making and receiving telephone calls,  
especially ringing when your line is called. The sum of all Ringer Equivalence  
Numbers of the equipment on your telephone line should be less than five in  
January 1, 1996: Council Directive 89/336/EEC (92/31/EEC), approximation  
of the laws of the Member States related to electromagnetic compatibility.  
March 9, 1999: Council Directive 1999/5/EC on radio equipment and  
telecommunications terminal equipment and the mutual recognition of their  
conformity.  
iv  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
A full declaration, defining the relevant Directives and referenced standards  
can be obtained from your Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. representative.  
You must have a 13 amp fuse in the plug, adaptor, or at the distribution board.  
EC Certification  
Certification to 1999/5/EC Radio Equipment & Telecommunications  
Terminal Equipment Directive (FAX)  
This Samsung product has been self-certified by Samsung for pan-European  
single terminal connection to the analogue public switched telephone  
network (PSTN) in accordance with Directive 1999/5/EC. The product has  
been designed to work with the national PSTNs and compatible PBXs of the  
European countries:  
In the event of problems, you should contact the Euro QA Lab of Samsung  
Electronics Co., Ltd. in the first instance.  
The product has been tested against TS 103 021. To assist in the use and  
application of terminal equipment which complies with this standard, the  
European Telecommunication Standards Institute (ETSI) has issued an  
advisory document (EG 201 121) which contains notes and additional  
requirements to ensure network compatibility of TS 103 021 terminals. The  
product has been designed against, and is fully compliant with, all of the  
relevant advisory notes contained in this document.  
Replacing the Fitted Plug (for UK Only)  
Important  
The mains lead for this machine is fitted with a standard (BS 1363) 13 amp  
plug and has a 13 amp fuse. When you change or examine the fuse, you  
must re-fit the correct 13 amp fuse. You then need to replace the fuse cover.  
If you have lost the fuse cover, do not use the plug until you have another fuse  
cover.  
Please contact the people from you purchased the machine.  
The 13 amp plug is the most widely used type in the UK and should be  
suitable. However, some buildings (mainly old ones) do not have normal 13  
amp plug sockets. You need to buy a suitable plug adaptor. Do not remove  
the moulded plug.  
Warning  
If you cut off the moulded plug, get rid of it straight away.  
You cannot rewire the plug and you may receive an electric shock if you  
plug it into a socket.  
Important warning: You must earth this machine.  
The wires in the mains lead have the following color code:  
• Green and Yellow:  
• Blue:  
Earth  
Neutral  
Live  
• Brown:  
If the wires in the mains lead do not match the colors marked in your plug, do  
the following:  
You must connect the green and yellow wire to the pin marked by the letter  
“E” or by the safety ‘Earth symbol’ or colored green and yellow or green.  
You must connect the blue wire to the pin which is marked with the letter “N”  
or colored black.  
You must connect the brown wire to the pin which is marked with the letter “L”  
or colored red.  
v
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
vi  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Save time and money  
You can print multiple pages on one single sheet of  
1 Introduction  
paper to save paper.  
You can use preprinted forms and letterhead with plain  
paper. See Software section.  
Thank you for purchasing this Samsung multifunctional product. Your  
machine provides printing, copying, scanning, and faxing functions.  
• This machine automatically conserves electricity by  
substantially reducing power consumption when not in  
use.  
This chapter includes:  
Special features  
Machine overview  
Expand your machine’s capacity  
Control panel overview  
Introducing the touch screen and useful buttons  
Understanding the Status LED  
Menu map  
Your machine has 256 MB of memory which can be  
expanded to 384 MB. (Page 13.1)  
• A Network interface enables network printing. Your  
machine comes with a built-in network interface, 10/  
100 Base TX.  
• Zoran IPS Emulation* compatible with PostScript 3  
Emulation* (PS) enables PS printing.  
Note  
Some features are optional. Please check the specifications  
sections. (Page 14.1)  
* Zoran IPS Emulation compatible with PostScript 3  
© Copyright 1995-2005, Zoran Corporation. All rights  
reserved. Zoran, the Zoran logo, IPS/PS3, and  
OneImage are trademarks of Zoran Corporation.  
Special features  
• 136 PS3 fonts  
Contains UFST and MicroType from Monotype Imaging Inc.  
Your new machine is equipped with special features.  
Print with excellent quality and speed  
You can print with a resolution of up to 1200 dpi  
Effective output. See Software section.  
Your machine prints A4-sized paper at up to 43 ppm  
and letter-sized paper at up to 45 ppm.  
Print in various environments  
You can print with Windows 98/Me/NT 4.0/2000 and  
Windows XP/2003 (32/64bit) as well as Linux and  
Macintosh systems.  
Your machine is equipped with a USB interface and a  
network interface.  
a
• For duplex printing, your machine prints A4-sized  
b
paper at up to 40 ipm and letter-sized paper at up to  
42 ipm.  
Handle different paper options with flexibility  
Copy originals in several formats  
• The multi-purpose tray supports letterhead,  
envelopes, labels, transparencies, custom-sized  
media, postcards, and heavy paper. The multi-  
purpose tray holds up to 100 sheets of plain paper.  
• The 520 sheet tray 1 and 520 sheet optional tray  
support plain paper in various sizes.  
You can create a booklet using sequential 2-sided  
document production.  
• There are special functions to erase punch holes,  
staple marks and newspaper background.  
• The print quality and image size may be adjusted and  
enhance at the same time.  
Create professional documents  
• Print Watermarks. You can customize your documents  
with words, such as “Confidential”. See Software  
section.  
• Print Posters. The text and pictures of each page of  
your document are magnified and printed across the  
sheet of paper and can then be taped together to form  
a poster. See Software section.  
Scan the originals and send it right away  
• Quickly scan and send files to multiple destinations  
using, E-mail, SMB, FTP or Networks scanning.  
• Simply use the touch screen keyboard to enter email  
addresses and send the scanned image immediately.  
• Scan in color and use the precise compressions of  
JPEG, TIFF and PDF formats.  
Set a specific time to transmit a Fax (Optional)  
You can specify a certain time to transmit the fax and  
also send the fax to several stored destinations.  
• After the transmission, the machine may print out the  
fax reports according to the setting.  
a. pages per minute  
b. images per minute  
1.1  
<Introduction>  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Machine overview  
These are the main components of your machine.  
Front view  
• The figure above shows an SCX-6345N with some available accessories.  
• The symbol * is a mark for the optional device.  
a
*
1
2
11  
12  
13  
14  
15  
16  
17  
18  
19  
DADF cover  
optional tray  
*
DADF document width guides  
DADF document input tray  
DADF document output tray  
scanner lid  
stand  
3
output support  
b
4
CCD Lock  
5
multi-purpose tray extension  
multi-purpose tray paper width guides  
scanner glass  
6
control panel  
7
side cover  
8
multi-purpose tray  
front cover  
toner cartridge  
9
drum cartridge  
10  
tray 1  
a. DADF (Duplex Automatic Document Feeder): The machine with this feature scans both sides of a paper.  
b. CCD (Charge Coupled Device) Lock: It is the hardware which enables the scan job. It is also used to hold the CCD module to prevent any damage when you  
move the machine.  
1.2  
<Introduction>  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                                   
Rear view  
• The figure above shows an SCX-6345N with some available accessories.  
• The symbol * is a mark for the optional device.  
*
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
finisher (Stacker & Stapler)  
network port  
*
*
finisher output tray (Stacker & Stapler)  
dummy for FDI (Foreign Device Interface )  
15-pin Finisher connection (Stacker & Stapler)  
power switch  
*
*
9
finisher cover (Stacker & Stapler)  
*
10  
11  
extension telephone socket (EXT)  
*
telephone line socket (LINE)  
power receptacle  
USB port  
1.3  
<Introduction>  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                     
Control panel overview  
1
2
3
8
9
Machine Setup: Leads you to the machine setup and advanced  
settings. (Page 9.1)  
Redial/Pause: In standby mode, redials the last number, or in edit  
mode, inserts a pause into a fax number.  
Job Status: Shows the jobs currently running, queued jobs or  
completed jobs.  
On Hook Dial: Engages the telephone line.  
10  
Screen brightness dial: Adjusts the brightness of the touch  
Power Saver: Sends the machine into the power saver mode.  
screen.  
(Page 3.4)  
4
5
11  
12  
Status: Shows the status of your machine. (Page 1.6)  
Interrupt: Stops a job in process to do an urgent copy job.  
Display screen: Displays the current machine status and prompts  
during an operation. You can set menus easily using the touch  
screen.  
Clear All: Reverts the current settings to the default values.  
6
7
13  
14  
number keypad: Dials fax number, and enters the number value for  
document copies or other options.  
Stop: Stops an operation at any time. The pop up window appears  
on the screen showing the current job that the user can stop or  
resume.  
Clear: Deletes characters in the edit area.  
Start: Starts a job.  
Caution  
When you use the touch screen, use your finger only. The screen may be damaged with a sharpen pen or else.  
1.4  
<Introduction>  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                               
Job Status button  
Introducing the touch screen and useful buttons  
When you press this button, the screen shows the lists of currently  
running jobs, queued jobs and completed jobs.  
Touch screen  
The touch screen allows for user-friendly operation of the machine. Once  
you press the home icon (  
) on the screen, it shows the Main screen.  
Current Job tab: Shows the list of jobs in progress and pending.  
Completed Job tab: Provides the list of completed jobs.  
Active Notice tab: Displays any error codes that have occurred.  
: Shows Help. You can find the explanation by feature contents.  
No.: Gives the order of jobs. The job in No. 001 is currently in  
progress.  
Copy: Enters the Copy menu.  
Fax: Enters the Fax menu. (Optional)  
Job Name: Shows job information like name and type.  
Status: Gives the current status of each job.  
Scan: Enters Scan to Email, NetScan, Scan to Server menu.  
Stored Documents: Enters the Stored Documents menu.  
(Page 10.2)  
User: Provides user name, mainly computer name.  
Job Type: Displays details of the active job, such as job type,  
recipient phone number and other information.  
Logout: Logs out from the currently logged in account.  
Note  
Delete: Removes the selected job from the list.  
• Icons shown on the display screen such as Fax may be  
grayed out, depending on the optional kit or program installed in  
your machine.  
Detail: Shows the detailed information of the selected option on  
the Active Notice list.  
Close: Closes the job status window and switches to previous  
view.  
To switch the display screen and see other available icons,  
press the right arrow on the display screen.  
Power Saver button  
Machine Setup button  
When the machine is not in use, save electricity with the provided power  
save mode. Pressing this button puts the machine into power save mode.  
(Page 3.4)  
When you press this button, you can browse current machine settings or  
change machine values. (Page 9.1)  
Status  
Description  
Off  
The machine is not in the power save mode.  
The machine is in the low power save mode.  
The machine is in the power save mode.  
Blue  
On  
Blink  
Interrupt button  
Machine Status: Shows the current status of the machine.  
Admin Setting: Allows an administrator to set up the machine.  
When you press this button, the machine goes into interrupt mode which  
means it stops a printing job for urgent copy job. When the urgent copy  
job completes, the previous printing job continues.  
Status  
Description  
Off  
The machine is not in interrupt printing mode.  
The machine is in interrupt printing mode.  
Blue  
On  
1.5  
<Introduction>  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
               
Note  
Menu map  
Interrupt mode is resumed at default value (Off) after the  
machine is shut down or reset.  
The control panel provides access to various menus to set up the  
machine or use the machine's functions. These menus can be accessed  
by pressing Machine Setup, Job Status or touching menus on the  
display screen. Refer to the following diagram.  
Understanding the Status LED  
When the problem occurs, the Status LED indicates the machine's  
condition by the light color of it's action.  
Main screen  
The Main screen is shown on the display screen on the control panel.  
Some menus are grayed out depending on your model.  
Status  
Status  
Description  
• The machine is off-line.  
• The machine is in power save mode. When  
data is received, or any button is pressed, it  
switches to on-line automatically.  
Copy  
Fax  
Off  
Basic tab (Page 5.1)  
Original Size  
Reduce/Enlarge  
Duplex  
Basic tab (Page 6.1)  
Address  
Duplex  
Resolution  
Output  
Original Type  
Darkness  
Advanced tab (Page 6.1)  
Original Size  
Delay Send  
Green On  
The machine is on-line and can be used.  
Paper Supply  
Advanced tab (Page 5.1)  
ID Copy  
Priority Send  
Polling  
Mailbox  
Blinking • When the backlight slowly blinks, the machine  
is receiving data from the computer.  
N-Up  
Image tab (Page 6.2)  
Original Type  
Darkness  
Poster Copy  
Clone Copy  
Book Copy  
• When the backlight blinks rapidly, the machine  
is printing data.  
Erase Background  
Color Mode  
Booklet  
Covers  
Red  
On  
• The drum cartridge is totally out of lifespan.  
Remove the old drum cartridge and install a  
new one. (Page 10.4)  
• The toner cartridge is totally empty. Remove  
the old toner cartridge and install a new one.  
(Page 10.3)  
Transparencies  
Image tab (Page 5.1)  
Erase Edge  
Erase Background  
Margin Shift  
• A paper jam has occurred. (Page 11.2)  
• The cover is opened. Close the cover.  
• There is no paper in the tray. Load paper in  
the tray.  
• The machine has stopped due to a major  
error. Check the display message.  
(Page 11.8)  
Stored Documents  
Scan  
Public tab (Page 10.2)  
Scan to Email  
Detail  
Basic tab (Page 7.1)  
Advanced tab (Page 7.2)  
Image tab (Page 7.2)  
Output tab (Page 7.2)  
NetScan  
Edit  
Delete  
Print  
Secured tab (Page 10.2)  
Detail  
Edit  
Delete  
Print  
Scan to Server  
Blinking • A minor error has occurred and the machine  
is waiting the error to be cleared. Check the  
display message. When the problem is  
Basic tab (Page 7.2)  
Advanced tab (Page 7.2)  
Image tab (Page 7.2)  
Output tab (Page 7.2)  
cleared, the machine resumes.  
• The toner cartridge is low. Order a new toner  
cartridge. You can temporarily improve print  
quality by redistributing the toner. (Page 10.3)  
Note  
Check the message on the display screen, and follow the  
instruction on the message or refer to Troubleshooting part.  
(Page 11.1) If the problem persists, call for service.  
1.6  
<Introduction>  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Admin Setting  
Machine Setup button  
When you press the Machine Setup button on the control panel, the  
screen displays two menus. Machine Status show the supplies life,  
billing, counters and reports. Admin Setting lets you to set the advanced  
setup to use your machine in depth or conveniently.  
General tab  
Setup tab  
(Page 9.2)  
(Page 9.3)  
Device Info  
Copy Setup  
Date & Time  
Fax Setup  
Default Settings  
Measurement  
Timers  
Network Setup  
Authentication  
Optional Service  
Remote Service  
Machine Status  
Language  
Supplies Life tab  
Machine Info tab  
Energy Saver  
Tray Management  
Altitude Adjustment  
Output Option  
Contention Management  
Sound  
Supplies Management  
Machine Test  
On Demand Overwrite  
(Page 9.1)  
(Page 9.1)  
Toner Cartridge  
Drum Cartridge  
Fuser Kit  
Machine Details  
Customer Support  
Machine Serial Number  
Hardware Options  
Configuration  
Feed Roller Kit  
Feed Roller Kit - Bypass Tray  
Document Feeder Roller  
BTR Kit  
Software Versions  
Tray Status  
DADF Friction Pad Kit  
Tray  
Status  
Paper Size  
Paper Type  
Print/Report tab  
Print/Report  
System Report  
(Page 9.7)  
Print  
Accounting Reports  
Report  
Scan Report  
Fax Report  
Supplies Information  
Total Impressions  
Black Impressions  
Black Copied Impressions  
Black Printed Impressions  
Sheets  
Copied Sheets  
Black Copied Sheets  
Printed Sheets  
Job Status button  
Black Printed Sheets  
2 Sided Sheets  
Copied 2 Sided Sheets  
Black Copied 2-Sided  
Sheets  
This menu shows the job in process, in waiting, in completed and the  
notice message such as an error. (Page 1.5)  
Printed 2 Sided Sheets  
Black Printed 2-Sided  
Sheets  
Analog Fax Sheets  
Analog Fax 2-Sided Sheets  
Fax Image Received  
Analog Fax Images Sent  
Analog Fax Images  
Received  
Images Sent  
Network Scanning Images  
Sent  
Email Images Sent  
Maintenance Impressions  
Black Maintenance  
Impressions  
Current Job tab  
Completed Job tab  
Detail  
Delete  
Detail  
Active Notice tab  
Detail  
1.7  
<Introduction>  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
CD  
Printer  
Contents  
2 Software overview  
Linux  
PostScript Printer Description:  
Use this driver to run your machine  
from a Linux computer and print  
documents.  
This chapter gives you an overview of the software that comes with your  
machine. Further details how to use the software are explained in the  
Software section.  
software CD  
(Continue)  
SANE: Use this driver to scan  
documents.  
This chapter includes:  
Supplied software  
Printer driver features  
System requirements  
Macintosh  
Postscript Printer Description  
(PPD) file: Use this file to run your  
machine from a Macintosh computer  
and print documents.  
Scan driver: TWAIN driver is  
available for scanning documents on  
your machine.  
Supplied software  
You must install the printer and scanner software using the supplied CDs  
after you have set up your machine and connected it to your computer.  
Network  
Utilities CD  
Windows  
SyncThru™ Web Admin Service  
Use this web-based program to  
remotely manage, monitor, and  
troubleshoot network printers.  
:
Each CD provides you with the following software:  
CD  
Contents  
SetIP: Use this program to set your  
Printer  
software CD  
Windows  
Printer driver: Use this driver to  
take full advantage of your printer’s  
features.  
machine’s TCP/IP addresses.  
Network Printer User’s Guide in  
PDF  
PostScript Printer Description  
(PPD) file: Use the PostScript driver  
to print documents with complex  
fonts and graphics in the PS  
language.  
a. Allows you to edit a scanned image in many ways using a powerful image  
editor and to send the image by email. You can also open another image editor  
program, like Adobe Photoshop, from SmarThru. For details, please refer to the  
onscreen help supplied on the SmarThru program.  
Scanner driver: TWAIN and  
Windows Image Acquisition (WIA)  
drivers are available for scanning  
documents on your machine.  
Smart Panel: This program allows  
you to monitor the machine’s status  
and alerts you when an error occurs  
during printing.  
a
SmarThru : This is the  
accompanying Windows-based  
software for your multifunctional  
machine.  
Network Scan: This program allows  
you to scan a document on your  
machine and save it to a network-  
connected computer.  
Direct Printing Utility: This program  
allows you to print PDF files directly.  
2.1  
<Software overview>  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Printer driver features  
System requirements  
Your printer drivers support the following standard features:  
• Paper source selection  
Before you begin, ensure that your system meets the following  
requirements:  
• Paper size, orientation and media type  
• Number of copies  
Windows  
Item  
Requirements  
Recommended  
In addition, you can use various special printing features. The following  
table shows a general overview of features supported by your printer  
drivers:  
Operating  
system  
Windows 98/Me/NT 4.0/2000/XP/2003  
PCL 6  
PostScript  
CPU  
RAM  
Windows 98/  
Me/NT 4.0/2000 400 MHz or  
higher  
Pentium II  
Pentium III  
933 MHz  
Feature  
Windows  
Windows  
Macintosh  
Linux  
O
Toner save  
O
O
O
O
X
Windows XP/  
2003(32/64bit)  
Pentium III  
933 MHz or  
higher  
Pentium IV  
1 GHz  
Print quality  
option  
O
O
Windows 98/  
Me/NT 4.0/2000  
64 MB or more  
128 MB or more  
300 MB or more  
1 GB or more  
128 MB  
256 MB  
1 GB  
Poster  
printing  
O
O
X
X
X
Windows XP/  
2003(32/64bit)  
Multiple  
pages per  
sheet (N-up)  
O
O
O
(2, 4)  
Free disk  
space  
Windows 98/  
Me/NT 4.0/2000  
Fit to page  
printing  
O
O
O
O
Windows XP/  
2003(32/64bit)  
5 GB  
Scale printing  
O
O
O
X
O
O
O
X
Internet  
Explorer  
5.0 or higher  
Different  
source for  
first page  
Note  
For Windows NT 4.0/2000/XP/2003, users who have an  
administrator right can install the software.  
Watermark  
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
X
X
X
X
O
X
X
X
X
O
X
X
O
X
X
X
X
O
a
Overlay  
b
Duplex  
O
O
O
O
O
O
Secu Print  
Delay Print  
Spool Print  
Proof Print  
Stapler  
a. The Overlay feature is not supported in NT 4.0.  
b. The machine with Duplex feature prints both side of a paper.  
2.2  
<Software overview>  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Linux  
Item  
Requirements  
• Red Hat 8 ~ 9  
Operating system  
• Fedora Core 1 ~ 4  
• Mandrake 9.2 ~ 10.1  
• SuSE 8.2 ~ 9.2  
CPU  
Pentium IV 1 GHz or higher  
256 MB or higher  
RAM  
Free disk space  
Software  
1 GB or higher  
• Linux Kernel 2.4 or higher  
• Glibc 2.2 or higher  
• CUPS  
• SANE  
Note  
• It is necessary to claim swap partition of 300 MB or larger for  
working with large scanned images.  
• The Linux scanner driver supports the optical resolution at  
maximum.  
Macintosh  
Item  
Requirements  
Macintosh 10.3 ~ 10.4  
Operating system  
RAM  
128 MB  
Free disk space  
Connection  
200 MB  
USB interface, Network interface  
2.3  
<Software overview>  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
A horizontal plane must be within 5 mm (0.02 inches) both from front  
to rear and from right to left.  
3 Getting Started  
This chapter gives you step-by-step instructions for setting up the  
machine.  
This chapter includes:  
Setting up the hardware  
Setting up the network  
Installing the software  
Machine's basic settings  
Understanding the keyboard  
2
3
4
5
6
7
Unpack the machine and check all the enclosed items.  
Remove the tape holding the machine tightly.  
Install both the toner cartridge and drum cartridge.  
Load paper. (Page 4.5)  
Setting up the hardware  
This section shows the steps to set up the hardware which is explained  
in Quick Install Guide. Make sure you read Quick Install Guide and  
complete following steps.  
1
Select a stable location.  
Make sure that all the cables are connected to the machine.  
Turn the machine on.  
Select a level, stable place with adequate space for air circulation.  
Allow extra space to open covers and trays. Under the altitude  
2,500 m (8,200 ft) is effective for printing. See the general settings  
for Altitude Adjustment in page 9.2.  
Note  
When you move the printer, do not tilt or turn it upside down.  
Or the inside of the printer may be contaminated by toner,  
which can cause damage to the printer or bad printing  
quality.  
The area should be well-ventilated and away from direct sunlight or  
sources of heat, cold, and humidity. Do not set the machine close to  
the edge of your desk or table.  
Setting up the network  
You need to set up the network protocols on the machine to use it as your  
network printer. You can set up the basic network settings with the  
machine's touch screen.  
Note  
• If you want to use the USB cable, connect the cable between a  
computer and you machine. Refer to the software installation in  
Software section.  
• For detailed information on network settings, please, refer to  
the Network Printer Quick Guide, or the on-line user's guide  
within Network Utilities CD.  
3.1  
<Getting Started>  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Note  
Supported operating systems  
Contact the network administrator, if you are not sure how to  
configure.  
The following table shows the network environments supported by the  
machine:  
10 Press OK.  
Item  
Requirements  
10/100 Base-TX  
Note  
You can also set up the network settings through the network  
administration programs. Refer to the user’s guide on the  
Network Utilities CD that came with your machine.  
Network interface  
Network operating  
system  
Novell NetWare 4.x, 5.x, 6.x  
Windows 98/Me/NT 4.0/2000/XP/2003  
Various Linux OS  
SyncThru™ Web Admin Service: Web-based printer  
management solution for network administrators. SyncThru™  
Web Admin Service provides you with an efficient way of  
managing network devices and lets you remotely monitor and  
troubleshoot network printers from any site with corporate  
internet access.  
Macintosh 10.3 ~ 10.4  
Network protocols  
IPX/SPX  
TCP/IP  
SyncThru™ Web Service: Web server embedded on your  
EtherTalk  
network print server, which allows you to:  
- Configure the network parameters necessary for the machine  
to connect to various network environments.  
Dynamicaddressing DHCP, BOOTP  
server  
- Customize email settings and set up address book for  
scanning to email.  
Configuring network protocol via the machine  
- Customize server settings and set up address book for  
scanning to the FTP or SMB servers.  
You can setup TCP/IP Network parameters please follow the steps listed  
below. To setup Netware and Apple Talk please refer to the on-line user's  
guide located on the Network Utilities CDs.  
- Customize printer, copy, and fax settings.  
SetIP: Utility program allowing you to select a network interface  
and manually configure the IP addresses for use with the TCP/  
IP protocol.  
1
Make sure your machine is connected to the network with an RJ-45  
Ethernet cable.  
2
3
4
5
Make sure you turned on the machine.  
Press Machine Setup on the control panel.  
Press Admin Setting.  
Installing the software  
You have to install the machine software for printing, copying, faxing, and  
scanning. The software includes drivers, applications, and other user  
friendly programs.  
When the login message appears, enter password. Touch the  
password input area, then the question marks appears. Use the  
number keypad on the control panel to enter the password. Once  
the password is entered, press OK. (Factory setting:1111)  
Note  
The following procedure is based on the Windows XP  
operating system. The procedure and popup window which  
appears during the installation may differ depending on the  
operating system, the printer feature, or the interface in use.  
(See Software section.)  
6
7
8
9
Press the Setup tab > Network Setup.  
Select TCP/IP Protocol.  
Press IP Setting.  
1
Make sure that the network setup for your machine is completed.  
(Page 3.1) All applications should be closed on your computer  
before beginning installation.  
Select Static and then enter IP Address, Subnet Mask and  
Gateway address fields. Touch the input area then, enter addresses  
by number keypad on the control panel.  
2
3
Insert the Printer Software CD-ROM into your CD-ROM drive.  
The CD-ROM should automatically run, and an installation window  
appears. Click Next.  
3.2  
<Getting Started>  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
If the installation window does not appear, click Start > Run. Type  
X:\Setup.exe, replacing “X” with the letter which represents your  
drive and click OK.  
• If you do not see your printer on the list, click Update to refresh the  
list, or select Add TCP/IP Port to add your printer to the network.  
To add the printer to the network, enter the port name and the IP  
address for the printer.  
To verify your printer’s IP address or the MAC address, print a  
Network Configuration page. (Page 10.1)  
To find a shared network printer (UNC Path), select Shared  
Printer [UNC] and enter the shared name manually or find a  
shared printer by clicking the Browse button.  
Note  
• If you are not sure of IP address, contact your network  
administrator or print network information. (Page 10.1)  
• If you cannot find your machine in network, please turn off  
the firewall and click Update.  
6
After the installation is finished, a window appears asking you to  
print a test page and to register yourself as a user of Samsung  
printers in order to receive information from Samsung. If you so  
desire, select the corresponding checkbox(es) and click Finish.  
• Select a language from the drop-down list, if necessary.  
4
Select Typical installation for a network printer, and then click  
Next.  
Note  
If your printer does not work properly after the installation,  
try to reinstall the printer driver. See Software section.  
5
The list of printers available on the network appears. Select the  
printer you want to install from the list and then click Next.  
Machine's basic settings  
After installation is complete, you may want to set the machine's default  
settings. Check the next explanation if you would like to set or change  
values.  
Setting the authentication password  
To set your machine up or change the settings, you have to login. To  
change password, follow the next steps.  
1
2
Press Machine Setup on the control panel.  
Press Admin Setting.  
3.3  
<Getting Started>  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
3
When the login message appears, enter password. Touch the  
password input area, then the question marks appears, use the  
number keypad on the control panel to enter the password. Then,  
press OK. (Factory setting:1111)  
6
7
Select the desired language.  
Press OK.  
Setting job timeout  
4
5
Press the Setup tab > Authentication.  
When there is no input for a certain period of time, the machine exits the  
current location. You can set the amount of time the machine will wait.  
Press Change Admin. Password  
.
1
2
3
Press Machine Setup on the control panel.  
Press Admin Setting.  
When the login message appears, enter password with number  
keypad and press OK. (Page 3.3)  
4
5
6
Press the General tab.  
Press Timers.  
6
7
Enter old and new password, and then confirm the new password.  
Select System Timeout.  
Press OK.  
You can set the Held Job Timeout option to over one hour.  
7
8
9
Select On.  
Setting the date and time  
Select a duration using left/right arrows.  
When you set the time and date, they are used in Delay fax and Delay  
Print, also they are printed on reports. If, however, they are not correct,  
you need to change it for correct time being.  
Press OK.  
1
2
3
Press Machine Setup on the control panel.  
Using energy saving feature  
Press Admin Setting.  
The machine provides energy saving features.  
When the login message appears, enter password with number  
keypad and press OK. (Page 3.3)  
1
2
3
Press Machine Setup on the control panel.  
Press Admin Setting.  
4
5
Press the General tab > Date & Time > Set Date&Time.  
When the login message appears, enter password with number  
Select date and time using left/right arrows. Or touch the insert area  
and use the numeric keypad on the control panel.  
keypad and press OK. (Page 3.3)  
4
5
6
Press the General tab.  
6
Press OK.  
Press down arrow to switch the screen, press Energy Saver.  
Select appropriate option and time.  
Note  
To change the format of date and time, press Date Format  
and Time Format.  
Changing the display language  
To change the language that appears on the display, refer to the following  
steps.  
1
2
3
Press Machine Setup on the control panel.  
Press Admin Setting.  
Scan Power Save: Turns off the scanner lamp under the glass.  
When the login message appears, enter password with number  
Standby to Low Power Mode: Keeps the temperature of the fuser  
unit under 100 °C, and turns off the fans within the machine except  
a core fan for the fuser unit.  
keypad and press OK. (Page 3.3)  
4
5
Press the General tab.  
Press the down arrow to switch the screen and press Language.  
3.4  
<Getting Started>  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                     
Low Power Mode to Sleep Mode: Turns off all the fans even for  
the fuser unit after certain time.  
Understanding the keyboard  
You can enter alphabet characters, numbers, or special symbols using  
the keyboard on the touch screen. This keyboard is specially arranged  
like a normal keyboard for better usability for the user.  
7
Press OK.  
Setting the default tray and paper  
Touch the input area where you need to enter characters and the  
keyboard pops up on the screen. The keyboard below is the default  
showing the lowercase letters.  
You can select the tray and paper you would like to keep using for printing  
job. (Page 9.2)  
1
2
3
Press Machine Setup on the control panel.  
Press Admin Setting.  
When the login message appears, enter password with number  
keypad and press OK. (Page 3.3)  
4
5
Press the General tab.  
Press the down arrow to switch the screen and press Tray  
Management.  
6
7
Select tray and its options such as paper size and type.  
Left/Right: Moves the cursor between characters in the input  
area.  
1
Press OK.  
Backspace: Deletes the character on the left side of the cursor.  
Delete: Deletes the character on the right side of the cursor.  
Clear: Deletes all characters in the input area.  
2
3
4
5
6
Note  
If the optional tray is not installed, the tray options on the screen  
is grayed out.  
Changing the default settings  
Input area: Enters letters within this line.  
You can set the default values for copy, fax, email, scan and paper all at  
once.  
Shift: Toggles between lowercase keys and uppercase keys or  
vice versa.  
Symbols: Switches from the alphanumeric keyboard to the  
symbol keyboard.  
7
1
2
3
Press Machine Setup on the control panel.  
Press Admin Setting.  
Space: Enters a blank between characters.  
OK: Saves and closes input result.  
8
9
When the login message appears, enter password with number  
keypad and press OK. (Page 3.3)  
Cancel: Cancels and closes input result.  
10  
4
5
Press the General tab > Default Settings > Default Option.  
Note  
Press the function you want to change, and change its settings.  
If you enter the email address, then the keyboard for email  
pops up. After you enter the address, press OK to activate  
entered address. Press the arrow key on the side for  
rotating between From, To, Cc, Bcc, Subject, Message in  
order.  
For example, if you want to change the default setting of the  
brightness & darkness for a copy job, press Copy > Darkness and  
adjust the brightness & darkness.  
6
Press OK.  
3.5  
<Getting Started>  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
               
2
Place the original face down on the scanner glass and align it with  
the registration guide at the top left corner of the glass.  
4 Loading originals and print  
media  
This chapter introduces you how to load originals and print media into  
your machine.  
This chapter includes:  
Loading originals  
Selecting print media  
Loading paper  
Setting the paper size and type  
Loading originals  
You can use the scanner glass or DADF to load an original for copying,  
scanning, and sending a fax.  
On the scanner glass  
3
Close the scanner lid.  
Make sure that no originals are in the DADF. If an original is detected in  
the DADF, the machine gives it priority over the original on the scanner  
glass. To get the best scan quality, especially for colored or gray-scaled  
images, use the scanner glass.  
Note  
• Leaving the scanner lid open while copying may affect copy  
quality and toner consumption.  
• Dust on the scanner glass may cause black spots on the  
printout. Always keep it clean. (Page 10.2)  
1
Lift and open the scanner lid.  
• If you are copying a page from a book or magazine, lift the  
scanner lid until its hinges are caught by the stopper and then  
close the lid. If the book or magazine is thicker than 30 mm,  
start copying with the lid open.  
In the DADF  
2
Using the DADF, you can load up to 50 sheets of 75 g/m (20 lb) paper  
for one job.  
When you use the DADF:  
• Do not load paper smaller than 174(W) x 128(L) mm or larger than  
218(W) x 356(L) mm.  
• Do not attempt to load the following types of paper:  
- carbon-paper or carbon-backed paper  
- coated paper  
- onion skin or thin paper  
- wrinkled or creased paper  
- curled or rolled paper  
- torn paper  
• Remove all staples and paper clips before loading.  
• Make sure any glue, ink, or correction fluid on the paper is completely  
dry before loading.  
• Do not load originals that include different sizes or weights of paper.  
• Do not load booklets, pamphlets, transparencies, or documents  
having other unusual characteristics.  
4.1  
<Loading originals and print media>  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                 
To load an original into the DADF:  
Selecting print media  
1
Load the originals face up into the DADF. Make sure that the bottom  
of the original stack matches the paper size marked on the  
document input tray.  
You can print on a variety of print media, such as plain paper, envelopes,  
labels, and transparencies. Always use print media that meet the  
guidelines for use with your machine. Print media that does not meet the  
guidelines outlined in this user’s guide may cause the following problems:  
• Poor print quality  
• Increased paper jams  
• Premature wear on the machine.  
Properties, such as weight, composition, grain, and moisture content, are  
important factors that affect the machine’s performance and the output  
quality. When you choose print materials, consider the following:  
• The type, size and weight of the print media for your machine are  
described later in this section.  
• Desired outcome: The print media you choose should be appropriate  
for your project.  
• Brightness: Some print media are whiter than others and produce  
sharper, more vibrant images.  
• Surface smoothness: The smoothness of the print media affects how  
crisp the printing looks on the paper.  
2
Adjust the document width guides to the paper size.  
Note  
• Some print media may meet all of the guidelines in this section  
and still not produce satisfactory results. This may be the result  
of improper handling, unacceptable temperature and humidity  
levels, or other variables over which Samsung has no control.  
• Before purchasing large quantities of print media, ensure that it  
meets the requirements specified in this user’s guide.  
Caution  
Using print media that does not meet these specifications may  
cause problems, requiring repairs. Such repairs are not covered  
by Samsung’s warranty or service agreements.  
Note  
Dust on the DADF glass may cause black streaks on the  
printout. Always keep it clean.  
4.2  
<Loading originals and print media>  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Specification on print media  
a
b
Type  
Plain paper  
Size  
Dimensions  
Weight  
Capacity  
Letter  
Legal  
Folio  
216 x 279 mm (8.5 x 11 inches)  
216 x 355.6 mm (8.5 x 14 inches)  
216 x 330 mm (8.5 x 13 inches)  
210 x 297 mm (8.27 x 11.69 inches)  
216 x 342.9 mm (8.5 x 13.5 inches)  
182 x 257 mm (7.17 x 10.1 inches)  
176 x 250 mm (6.92 x 9.84 inches)  
184.2 x 266.7 mm (7.25 x 10.5 inches)  
148.5 x 210 mm (5.85 x 8.27 inches)  
140 x 216 mm (5.5 x 8.5 inches)  
105 x 148.5 mm (4.13 x 5.85 inches)  
101.6 x 152.4 mm (4 x 6 inches)  
176 x 250 mm (6.92 x 9.84 inches)  
98.4 x 190.5 mm (3.88 x 7.5 inches)  
105 x 241 mm (4.12 x 9.5 inches)  
110 x 220 mm (4.33 x 8.66 inches)  
162 x 229 mm (6.38 x 9.02 inches)  
114 x 162 mm (4.48 x 6.37 inches)  
Refer to the Plain paper section  
• 60 to 90 g/m2 (16 to  
24 lb) for the tray  
• 60 to 163 g/m2 (16 to  
43 lb) for the multi-  
purpose tray  
• 520 sheets of 75 g/m2 (20 lb)  
paper for the tray  
• 100 sheets of 75 g/m2 (20 lb)  
in the multi-purpose tray  
A4  
Oficio  
JIS B5  
ISO B5  
Executive  
A5  
Statement  
A6  
Post Card 4x6  
Envelope B5  
Envelope Monarch  
Envelope No. 10  
Envelope DL  
Envelope C5  
Envelope C6  
Letter, A4, Oficio  
Envelope  
75 to 90 g/m2 (20 to  
24 lb)  
• 50 sheets of 75 g/m2 (20 lb)  
paper for the tray  
• 10 sheets of 75 g/m2 (20 lb) in  
the multi-purpose tray  
Transparency  
Labels  
138 to 146 g/m2 (37 to  
39 lb)  
• 100 sheets of 75 g/m2 (20 lb)  
paper for the tray  
• 20 sheets of 75 g/m2 (20 lb) in  
the multi-purpose tray  
Letter, Legal, Folio,  
A4, JIS B5, ISO B5,  
Executive, A5,  
Refer to the Plain paper section  
Refer to the Plain paper section  
120 to 150 g/m2 (32 to  
40 lb)  
• 100 sheets of 75 g/m2 (20 lb)  
paper for the tray  
• 10 sheets of 75 g/m2 (20 lb) in  
the multi-purpose tray  
Statement  
Card stock  
Letter, Legal, Folio,  
A4, JIS B5, ISO B5,  
Executive, A5,  
90 to 163 g/m2 (24 to  
43 lb)  
• 50 sheets of 75 g/m2 (20 lb)  
paper for the tray  
• 10 sheets of 75 g/m2 (20 lb) in  
the multi-purpose tray  
Statement  
Minimum size (custom)  
Maximum size (custom)  
98 x 148 mm (3.86 x 5.83 inches)  
216 x 355.6 mm (8.5 x 14 inches)  
60 to 163 g/m2 (16 to 43 lb)  
a. If media weight is over 90 g/m2 (24 lb), use the multi-purpose tray.  
b. Maximum capacity may differ depending on media weight, thickness, and environmental conditions.  
4.3  
<Loading originals and print media>  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Guidelines for special print media  
Media sizes supported in each mode  
Media type  
Guidelines  
Mode  
Size  
Source  
Envelopes  
• Successful printing on envelopes depends upon  
the quality of the envelopes. When selecting  
envelopes, consider the following factors:  
- Weight: The weight of the envelope paper  
should not exceed 90 g/m2 or jamming may  
occur.  
- Construction: Prior to printing, envelopes  
should lie flat with less than 6 mm curl, and  
should not contain air.  
Copy mode  
Letter, A4, Legal, Folio, • tray 1  
Oficio, Executive, ISO  
B5, A5  
• optional tray  
multi-purpose tray  
Single side  
printing  
All sizes supported by  
the machine  
• tray 1  
• optional tray  
• multi-purpose tray  
a
Duplex printing  
Letter, A4, Legal, Folio, • tray 1  
- Condition: Envelopes should not be wrinkled,  
nicked, or otherwise damaged.  
- Temperature: You should use envelopes that  
are compatible with the heat and pressure of  
the machine during operation.  
Oficio, JIS B5, ISO B5,  
Executive, A5,  
Statement  
• optional tray  
• multi-purpose tray  
b
Fax mode  
Letter, A4, Legal  
• tray 1  
• optional tray  
• Use only well-constructed envelopes with sharp  
and well creased folds.  
a. 75 to 90 g/m2 (20 ~ 24 lb) only  
b. Only the optional fax kit is installed.  
• Do not use stamped envelopes.  
• Do not use envelopes with clasps, snaps,  
windows, coated lining, self-adhesive seals, or  
other synthetic materials.  
• Do not use damaged or poorly made envelopes.  
• Be sure the seam at both ends of the envelope  
extends all the way to the corner of the  
envelope.  
Guidelines for selecting and storing print media  
When selecting or loading paper, envelopes, or other print materials,  
keep these guidelines in mind:  
• Always use print media that conform with the specifications listed on  
page 4.3.  
• Attempting to print on damp, curled, wrinkled, or torn paper can cause  
paper jams and poor print quality.  
Acceptable  
• For the best print quality, use only high quality copier grade paper  
specifically recommended for use in laser printers.  
• Avoid using the following media types:  
- Paper with embossed lettering, perforations, or a texture that is too  
smooth or too rough  
Unacceptable  
- Erasable bond paper  
- Multi-paged paper  
- Synthetic paper and thermally reactive paper  
- Carbonless paper and Tracing paper.  
• Envelopes with a peel-off adhesive strip or with  
more than one flap that folds over to seal must  
use adhesives compatible with the machine’s  
fusing temperature of 180 °C for 0.1 second.  
The extra flaps and strips might cause wrinkling,  
creasing, or jams, and may even damage the  
fuser.  
• For the best print quality, position margins no  
closer than 15 mm from the edges of the  
envelope.  
Use of these types of paper could result in paper jams, chemical  
smells, and damage to your machine.  
• Store print media in its ream wrapper until you are ready to use it.  
Place cartons on pallets or shelves, not on the floor. Do not place  
heavy objects on top of the paper, whether it is packaged or  
unpackaged. Keep it away from moisture or other conditions that can  
cause it to wrinkle or curl.  
• Store unused print media at temperatures between 15 °C and 30 °C.  
The relative humidity should be between 10% and 70%.  
• Avoid printing over the area where the  
envelope’s seams meet.  
• Store unused print media in a moisture-proof wrap, such as a plastic  
container or bag, to prevent dust and moisture from contaminating  
your paper.  
• Load special media types one sheet at a time through the multi-  
purpose tray to avoid paper jams.  
To prevent print media, such as transparencies and label sheets, from  
sticking together, remove them as they print out.  
4.4  
<Loading originals and print media>  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Media type  
Guidelines  
Media type  
Guidelines  
Transparencies • To avoid damaging the machine, use only  
transparencies designed for use in laser printers.  
• Transparencies used in the machine must be  
able to withstand 180 °C, the machine’s fusing  
temperature.  
Preprinted  
paper  
• Letterhead must be printed with heat-resistant  
ink that will not melt, vaporize, or release  
hazardous emissions when subjected to the  
machine’s fusing temperature of 180 °C for  
0.1 second.  
• Place them on a flat surface after removing them  
from the machine.  
• Do not leave them in the paper tray for long  
periods of time. Dust and dirt may accumulate  
on them, resulting in spotty printing.  
• Letterhead ink must be non-flammable and  
should not adversely affect printer rollers.  
• Forms and letterhead should be sealed in a  
moisture-proof wrapping to prevent changes  
during storage.  
To avoid smudging caused by fingerprints,  
handle them carefully.  
To avoid fading, do not expose printed  
transparencies to prolonged sunlight.  
• Ensure that transparencies are not wrinkled,  
curled, or have any torn edges.  
• Before you load preprinted paper, such as forms  
and letterhead, verify that the ink on the paper is  
dry. During the fusing process, wet ink can come  
off preprinted paper, reducing print quality.  
Loading paper  
Labels  
To avoid damaging the machine, use only labels  
designed for use in laser printers.  
• When selecting labels, consider the following  
factors:  
In the tray 1  
- Adhesives: The adhesive material should be  
stable at 180 °C, the machine’s fusing  
temperature.  
- Arrangement: Only use labels with no  
exposed backing between them. Labels can  
peel off sheets that have spaces between the  
labels, causing serious jams.  
Load the print media you use for the majority of your print jobs in the  
tray 1. The tray 1 can hold a maximum of 520 sheets of 75 g/m (20 lb)  
plain paper.  
2
You can purchase an optional tray and attach it below the standard tray  
to load an additional 520 sheets of paper. (Page 12.1)  
- Curl: Prior to printing, labels must lie flat with  
no more than 13 mm of curl in any direction.  
- Condition: Do not use labels with wrinkles,  
bubbles, or other indications of separation.  
• Make sure that there is no exposed adhesive  
material between labels. Exposed areas can  
cause labels to peel off during printing, which  
can cause paper jams. Exposed adhesive can  
also cause damage to machine components.  
• Do not run a sheet of labels through the machine  
more than once. The adhesive backing is  
designed for only a single pass through the  
machine.  
Loading paper in the tray 1 or optional tray  
1
To load paper, pull and open the paper Tray and place paper with  
the side you want to print facing up.  
• Do not use labels that are separating from the  
backing sheet or are wrinkled, bubbled, or  
otherwise damaged.  
Card stock or  
custom-sized  
materials  
• Do not print on media smaller than 98 mm wide  
or 148 mm long.  
• In the software application, set margins at least  
6.4 mm away from the edges of the material.  
2
After loading paper, set the paper type and size for the tray 1. See  
page 4.8 for copying and faxing or Software section for PC-  
printing.  
4.5  
<Loading originals and print media>  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
2
After inserting paper into the tray, while pinching the paper width  
guide as shown, move it toward the stack of paper until it lightly  
touches the side of the stack. Do not press the guide too tightly to  
the edge of the paper; the guide may bend the paper.  
Note  
• If you experience problems with paper feed, place one sheet at  
a time in the multi-purpose tray.  
• You can load previously printed paper. The printed side should  
be facing up with an uncurled edge at the front. If you  
experience problems with paper feed, turn the paper around.  
Note that print quality is not guaranteed.  
Changing the size of the paper in the paper tray  
To load longer sizes of paper, such as Legal-sized paper, you need to  
adjust the paper guides to extend the paper tray.  
1
Note  
• Do not push the paper width guides far enough to cause the  
materials to warp.  
• If you do not adjust the paper width guides, it may cause paper  
jams.  
2
paper length guide  
paper width guide  
1
2
1
Adjust the paper length guide to the desired paper length. It is  
preset to Letter or A4 size depending on the country. To load  
another size, hold the lever and move the length guide to the  
corresponding position.  
In the multi-purpose tray  
The multi-purpose tray can hold special sizes and types of print material,  
such as transparencies, postcards, note cards, and envelopes. It is useful  
for single page printing on letterhead or colored paper.  
To load paper in the multi-purpose tray:  
4.6  
<Loading originals and print media>  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
1
Open the multi-purpose tray and unfold the multi-purpose tray  
extension, as shown.  
4
Squeeze the multi-purpose tray paper width guides and adjust them  
to the width of the paper. Do not force too much, or the paper will be  
bent, which will result in a paper jam or skew.  
2
If you are using paper, flex or fan the edge of the paper stack to  
separate the pages before loading.  
Note  
Depending on the media type you are using, keep the following  
loading guidelines:  
• Envelopes: Flap side down and with the stamp area on the top  
left side.  
• Transparencies: Print side up and the top with the adhesive  
strip entering the machine first.  
• Labels: Print side up and top short edge entering the machine  
first.  
For transparencies, hold them by the edges and avoid touching the  
print side. Oils from your fingers can cause print quality problems.  
• Preprinted paper: Design side up with the top edge toward the  
machine.  
3
Load the paper.  
• Card stock: Print side up and the short edge entering the  
machine first.  
• Previously printed paper: Previously printed side down with an  
uncurled edge toward the machine.  
5
6
After loading paper, set the paper type and size for the multi-  
purpose tray. See page 4.8 for copying and faxing or the Software  
section for PC-printing.  
Note  
The settings made from the printer driver override the  
settings on the control panel.  
After printing, fold the multi-purpose tray extension and close the  
multi-purpose tray.  
Note  
If you want to load the used paper, place the paper with the  
printed side facing down.  
4.7  
<Loading originals and print media>  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Tips on using the multi-purpose tray  
• Load only one size of print media at a time in the multi-purpose tray.  
To prevent paper jams, do not add paper when there is still paper in  
the multi-purpose tray. This also applies to other types of print media.  
• Print media should be loaded face down with the top edge going into  
the multi-purpose tray first and be placed in the center of the tray.  
• Always load only the specified print media to avoid paper jams and  
print quality problems. (Page 4.2)  
• Flatten any curl on postcards, envelopes, and labels before loading  
them into the multi-purpose tray.  
Setting the paper size and type  
After loading paper in the paper tray, you need to set the paper size and  
type. These settings will apply to Copy and Fax modes.  
For PC-printing, you need to select the paper size and type in the  
application program you use on your PC. (See Software section.)  
1
2
3
Press Machine Setup on the control panel.  
Press Admin Setting.  
When the login message appears, enter password with number  
keypad and press OK. (Page 3.3)  
4
5
Press the General tab.  
Press the down arrow to switch the screen, press Tray  
Management.  
6
7
Select tray and its options such as paper size and type.  
Press OK.  
4.8  
<Loading originals and print media>  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Advanced tab  
5 Copying  
This chapter gives you information about using your machine as a copy  
machine.  
This chapter includes:  
Understanding the Copy screen  
Copying originals  
Changing the settings for each copy  
Using special copy features  
ID Copy: Prints 2-sided originals on one sheet of paper. This  
feature is helpful for copying a small-sized item, such as a  
business card. (Page 5.4)  
Understanding the Copy screen  
N-Up: Prints 2 or 4 original images, reduced to fit onto one sheet of  
paper. (Page 5.4)  
When you press Copy on the Main screen, the Copy screen appears  
which has several tabs and lost of copying options. All the options are  
grouped by features so that you can configure your selections easily.  
Poster Copy: Prints a large image into divided 9 pages.  
(Page 5.5)  
Clone Copy: Prints multiple image copies from the original  
document on a single page. (Page 5.5)  
If the screen displays an other menu, press (  
screen.  
) to go to the Main  
Book Copy: Allows you to copy an entire book. (Page 5.5)  
Booklet: Creates booklets from a sequential set of either 1-sided  
or 2-sided originals. (Page 5.6)  
Basic tab  
Covers: Automatically adds covers to your copied set using stock  
taken from a different tray. (Page 5.6)  
Transparencies: Adds a blank or printed divider between  
transparencies within a set. (Page 5.6)  
Image tab  
Original Size: Selects the size of the originals. (Page 5.2)  
Reduce/Enlarge: Reduces or enlarges the size of a copied image.  
(Page 5.3)  
Duplex: Sets the machine to print copies on both sides of the  
paper. (Page 5.3)  
Output: Selects Collated or Uncollated copy options. If you install  
the optional stacker & stapler, then the staple related option  
appears. (Page 5.3)  
Erase Edge: Allows you to erase punch holes, staple marks, and  
fold creases along any of the four documents edges. (Page 5.7)  
Text, Text/Photo, Photo: Improves the copy quality by selecting  
the document type for the current copy job. (Page 5.4)  
Erase Background: Prints an image with no background.  
(Page 5.7)  
Light, Dark: Adjusts the brightness level to make a copy that is  
easier to read, when the original contains faint markings and dark  
images. (Page 5.4)  
Margin Shift: Creates a binding edge for the document.  
(Page 5.7)  
Paper Supply: Selects the paper supply tray.  
5.1  
<Copying>  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
               
Copying originals  
Changing the settings for each copy  
This is the normal and usual procedure for copying your originals.  
On the Basic tab of the Copy screen, you can select copy features  
before starting to copy.  
1
2
Press Copy from the Main screen.  
Note  
Place originals, face up, in the DADF, or you can use the scanner  
glass with a single original document face down.  
The Basic tab setting is only for each copy. That means that the  
setting does not apply to the next copy job. After finishing the  
current copy job, the machine automatically restores the default  
settings after certain time. Or the machine resume to default  
setting when you press the Clear All button on the control panel  
or when you press other menu such as fax or else except the  
Job Status screen.  
The default copy setting can be changed in Admin Setting.  
(Page 9.2)  
Changing the size of originals  
Press the Basic tab > Original Size, then use left/right arrows to set the  
original size.  
Press more to see the detail values.  
3
Adjust the settings for each copy such as Original Size, Reduce/  
Enlarge, Duplex and more. (Page 5.2, Page 5.3)  
Custom: Selects the scanning area of the original. Press the  
cardinal point arrows to set the size.  
Auto: Automatically detects the size of originals, but this option  
supports only when originals are Legal, Letter, or A5 sized. If the  
originals is mixed-sized, then the machine detects the largest  
original size and select the largest-sized paper in the tray.  
4
Select the tray by pressing the appropriate tray on screen.  
Mixed Size (Letter & Legal): Allows for the use of both of Letter  
and Legal sized papers together, and the machine uses the  
proper-sized paper from several trays. For example, if the originals  
are total 3 pages, 1st page is the letter-sized paper, 2nd page is  
the legal-sized paper, and 3rd page is the letter-sized paper, then  
the machine prints the output first letter, legal, and letter in order  
from several trays.  
• Other preset values: Allows user to easily select commonly used  
values.  
5
6
Enter the number of copies using the number keypad, if necessary.  
Press Start on the control panel to begin copying.  
Note  
To cancel the current copy job, press Stop on the control panel.  
Or you can delete the current and pending job using Job Status  
on the control panel. Select the job you want to cancel and  
press Delete.  
5.2  
<Copying>  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
2 -> 1 Sided: Scans both sides of the originals and prints each of  
one on a separate sheet.  
Reducing or enlarging copies  
Press the Basic tab > Reduce/Enlarge, then use left/right arrows to  
reduce or enlarge an image on the paper.  
Press more to see the values.  
2 -> 2 Sided: Scans both sides of the original and prints on both  
sides of the paper. This function produces exactly the same print  
out from the originals.  
2 -> 1 Sided, Rotate Side 2: Scans both sides of the original and  
prints each one on a separate sheet, but the information on the  
back side of the printout is rotated 180°.  
Original(100%): Prints texts or images the same size as originals.  
Auto Fit: Reduces or enlarges the original based on the size of the  
output paper.  
• Other preset values: Allows you to easily select commonly used  
values.  
Note  
The Custom option is different depending on where the  
originals is placed. In the DADF, 25~200% adjustment is  
possible. And in the scanner glass, 25~400% adjustment is  
possible.  
Deciding the form of copy output (Collated /  
Staple)  
Press the Basic tab > Output, then use left/right arrows to select Collated  
or Stapled. This feature is supported only when the original is on the  
DADF.  
Copying on both sides of originals (Duplex)  
Press the Basic tab > Duplex, then use left/right arrows to select Duplex  
value.  
Press more to see the values.  
Collated: Prints output in sets to match the sequence of originals.  
Press more to see the detail values.  
1 -> 1 Sided: Scans one side of an original and prints on one side  
of the paper, this function produces exactly the same print out from  
originals.  
Uncollated: Prints output sorted into stacks of individual pages.  
1 -> 2 Sided: Scans one side of originals and prints them on both  
sides of the paper.  
Staple, Portrait: Adds a single staple to all of your portrait-  
oriented output.  
1 -> 2 Sided, Rotate Side 2: Scans one side of the originals and  
prints on both sides of the paper, but the information on the back  
side of the print out is rotated 180°.  
5.3  
<Copying>  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
Staple, Landscape: Adds a single staple to all of your landscape-  
1
Place a single original face down on the scanner glass. (Page 4.1)  
oriented output.  
Note  
Note  
The Staple feature is available with an optional stacker &  
stapler. (Page 12.1)  
The original must be placed on the scanner glass to use this  
feature.  
2
3
4
Press Copy from the Main screen.  
Selecting the type of original (Text/Photo)  
Press the Advanced tab > ID Copy.  
Press the Basic tab and select an appropriate original type.  
Press Start on the control panel.  
Then the machine starts scanning the front side.  
5
Turn the original over and place it on the scanner glass.  
Text: Use for originals containing mostly text.  
Text/Photo: Use for originals with mixed text and photographs.  
Photo: Use when originals are photographs.  
Changing the darkness  
This defines the degree of darkness. Use left/right arrows to change the  
level of light/dark in the printouts.  
6
Press Start on the control panel to begin copying.  
Note  
• If the original is larger than the printable area, some portions  
may not be printed.  
• If this option is grayed out, select the Duplex option to 1 -> 1  
Sided, the Output option to Collated.  
Using special copy features  
On the Advanced tab or the Image tab of the Copy screen, you can  
select specific copy features.  
2-up or 4-up copying (N-up)  
The machine reduces the size of the original images and prints 2 or 4  
pages onto one sheet of paper.  
ID card copying  
The machine prints one side of the original on the upper half of the paper  
and the other side on the lower half without reducing the size of the  
original. This feature is helpful for copying a small-sized item, such as a  
business card.  
2-up copying  
4-up copying  
1
2
Load the originals, face up, in the DADF. (Page 4.1)  
Note  
The originals must be loaded in the DADF to use this feature.  
Press Copy from the Main screen.  
5.4  
<Copying>  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                   
3
4
Press the Advanced tab > N-Up.  
Clone copying  
Select Off, 2Up, or 4Up.  
The machine prints multiple original images on a single page. The  
number of images is automatically determined by the original image and  
the paper size.  
Off: Copies an original onto one sheet of paper.  
2Up: Copies two separate originals onto one page.  
4Up: Copies four separate originals onto one page.  
5
Press Start on the control panel.  
Note  
You cannot adjust the copy size using the Reduce/Enlarge for  
the N-Up feature.  
1
Place a single original face down on the scanner glass. (Page 4.1)  
Poster copying  
Note  
Your original will be divided into 9 portions. You can paste the printed  
pages together to make one poster-sized document. This copy feature is  
available only when you place originals on the scanner glass. Each  
portion is scanned and printed on by one in the following order.  
The original must be placed on the scanner glass in order to use  
this feature.  
2
3
Press Copy from the Main screen.  
Press the Advanced tab > Clone Copy.  
Note  
This feature is available only when the options in the Basic tab  
are selected as below;  
- Duplex to 1 -> 1 Sided  
- Reduce/Enlarge to Original(100%)  
- Paper Supply to Tray.  
1
Place a single original face down on the scanner glass. (Page 4.1)  
4
5
6
Press On to activate this feature.  
Press OK.  
Note  
The original must be placed on the scanner glass to use this  
feature.  
Press Start on the control panel to begin copying.  
2
3
Press Copy from the Main screen.  
Book copying  
Press the Advanced tab > Poster Copy.  
Use this feature to copy a book. If the book is too thick, lift the scanner lid  
until its hinges are engaged by the stopper and then close the scanner  
lid. If the book or magazine is thicker than 30 mm(1.18 inches), start  
copying with the scanner lid open.  
Note  
This feature is available only when the options in the Basic tab  
are selected as below;  
- Duplex to 1 -> 1 Sided  
- Reduce/Enlarge to Original(100%)  
- Paper Supply to Tray.  
4
5
6
Press On to activate this feature.  
Press OK.  
Press Start on the control panel to begin copying.  
1
2
Place the originals face down on the scanner glass. (Page 4.1)  
Note  
Your original is divided into 9 portions. Each portion is scanned  
and printed one by one in the following order:  
Note  
The original must be placed on the scanner glass to use this  
feature.  
Press Copy from the Main screen.  
5.5  
<Copying>  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
3
4
Press the Advanced tab > Covers.  
Note  
To remove shadows of a book edge, press the Image tab >  
Erase Edge > Book Center and Edges Erase.  
Note  
Once you have set the Paper Supply option to Auto, you  
cannot use this feature.  
3
4
Press the Advanced tab > Book Copy.  
Press On to use this feature, and select detailed settings for each  
option.  
Select the binding option.  
Off: Disables this feature.  
Position: Selects whether the cover will be placed at the front,  
back, or both.  
Left Page: Prints left page of the book.  
Right Page: Prints right page of the book.  
Both Page: Prints both facing pages of the book.  
Cover Sheet: Selects whether the cover will be 1 sided, 2 sided, or  
blank paper.  
Paper Source: Select the paper tray, where the cover sheet is  
loaded.  
5
6
Press OK.  
Press Start on the control panel to begin copying.  
5
6
Press OK.  
Press Start on the control panel to begin copying.  
Booklet copying  
The machine automatically prints on both sides of the paper, when folded,  
which produces a booklet with all of the pages in the correct sequence.  
The machine will also reduce and correctly adjust the position of each  
image to fit on the selected paper.  
Transparency copying  
When you prepare transparencies for presentations, use this feature to  
copy the information.  
Note  
Before you start this special copy job, set the tray's Paper Types  
and Paper Size to Transparency.(Page 4.8)  
1
Place the originals face up in the DADF. Or place a single original  
face down on the scanner glass. (Page 4.1)  
1
Load the originals face up in the DADF. (Page 4.1)  
Note  
2
3
4
5
6
Load the right-sized transparencies into the tray you have set.  
Set the paper type to Transparency.  
The originals must be placed in the DADF in order to use this  
feature.  
Press Copy from the Main screen.  
2
3
4
5
6
Press Copy from the Main screen.  
Press the Advanced tab > Booklet.  
Press On to activate this feature.  
Press OK.  
Press the Advanced tab > Transparencies.  
Select Transparencies option.  
No Separator: Does not place separator sheets between  
transparencies.  
Blank Sheet: Places a blank sheet between transparencies.  
Press Start on the control panel to begin copying.  
Printed Sheet: Places the same image on the divider sheets as  
printed on the transparency.  
Note  
This feature is possible only with A4, Letter, Legal, Folio, Oficio,  
JIS B5, ISO B5, Executive, A5 and Statement sized paper.  
7
Select media sources, in case you selected either Blank Sheet or  
Printed Sheet.  
Cover copying  
8
9
Press OK.  
The machine automatically adds covers to your copied set using stock  
taken from a different tray. Covers must be the same size and orientation  
as the main body of the job.  
Press Start on the control panel to begin copying.  
1
Place the originals face up in the DADF. Or place a single original  
face down on the scanner glass. (Page 4.1)  
2
Press Copy from the Main screen.  
5.6  
<Copying>  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
Erasing edges  
Shifting margins  
You can copy the original without any edges or margins.  
You can secure a room for binding by shifting the margin of a page.  
1
Place a single original face down on the scanner glass. Or load the  
originals face up in the DADF. (Page 4.1)  
1
2
3
4
Place a single original face down on the scanner glass. (Page 4.1)  
Press Copy from the Main screen.  
2
3
4
Press Copy from the Main screen.  
Press the Image tab > Margin Shift  
Press the Image tab > Erase Edge.  
Select Margin Shift option.  
Select the appropriate option.  
Off: Disables this feature.  
Off: Disables this feature.  
Auto Center: Automatically centers of the paper copy. The original  
must be loaded on the scanner glass to use this feature. This  
option supports only the original is loaded on the scanner glass.  
Border Erase: Erases equal amounts on all edges of the copies.  
Small Original Erase: Erases 0.25" (6mm) from the edge of the  
copies. The original must be placed on the scanner glass to use  
this feature.  
Custom Margin: Adjusts the margin of the left and right, top and  
bottom as you want using arrows. This option supports both on the  
scanner glass or in DADF.  
Hole Punch Erase: Erases hole punch marks from the left edge of  
the copies.  
5
6
Press OK.  
Book Center and Edges Erase: Erases shadows of a binding or  
book edge from the center and side edges of the copies. This  
feature only applies when you do copying a book. (Page 5.5)  
Press Start on the control panel to begin copying.  
5
6
Press OK.  
Press Start on the control panel to begin copying.  
Erasing background images  
This feature is helpful when copying originals containing color in the  
background, as in newspapers or catalogs.  
1
Load the originals, face up, in the DADF. Or place a single original  
face down on the scanner glass.  
2
3
4
5
6
Press Copy from the Main screen.  
Press the Image tab > Erase Background.  
Press On to activate this feature.  
Press OK.  
Press Start on the control panel to begin copying.  
5.7  
<Copying>  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
               
Note  
If the optional fax feature is not installed the fax icon will not  
appear on the Main screen.  
6 Faxing (Optional)  
This chapter gives you information about using your machine as a fax  
machine.  
Basic tab  
This chapter includes:  
Preparing to fax  
Understanding the Fax screen  
Sending a fax  
Receiving a fax  
Adjusting the document settings  
Setting up a fax phonebook  
Using the polling option  
Using Mailbox  
Fax number input area: Shows the recipient's fax number using  
the number keypad on the control panel. If you configured the  
phone book, press Individual or Group. (Page 6.6)  
Printing a report after sending a fax  
Sending a fax in toll save time  
Adding documents to a reserved delay fax job  
Forwarding a received fax to other destination  
Add No: Lets you add more destinations.  
: Deletes the last digit entered.  
Note  
: Removes all digits of the selected entry.  
To use advanced features of the fax, press Machine Setup on  
the control panel and Admin Setting > Setup > Fax Setup.  
(Page 9.4)  
Remove: Removes the selected fax number entry.  
Remove All: Removes all the fax numbers in the input area.  
Address: Picks up the frequently used fax numbers directly from  
your machine or from SyncThru Web Service. (Page 6.7)  
Preparing to fax  
Duplex: Selects whether the machine send faxes one side of the  
original, both sides of the original.  
Before you send or receive a fax, you need to connect the supplied line  
cord to the wall jack. Refer to the Quick Install Guide how to make a  
connection. The method of making a telephone connection is varies from  
one country to another.  
Resolution: Adjusts the resolution options.  
Advanced tab  
Note  
If you want to add fax feature to the machine, check the option  
lists (Page 12.1) and contact the purchasing point to order.  
When you purchase a fax kit, install the kit by following the steps  
described in the Fax Kit Setup Guide which is enclosed in the  
kit. After installing the fax kit, set the machine to use this feature.  
(Page 13.3)  
Original Size: Selects the size of the original document. Press OK  
to update current setting.  
Understanding the Fax screen  
To use the fax feature, press Fax on the Main screen. If the screen  
Delay Send: Sets the machine to send a fax at a later time without  
your intervention. (Page 6.3)  
displays an other menu, press (  
) to go to the Main screen.  
Priority Send: Sends an urgent fax before reserved operations.  
(Page 6.4)  
Polling: Used when the receiver requests the document to be  
faxed remotely at sender's absence or vice versa. In order to use  
the polling function, the originals must be previously stored in the  
machine. (Page 6.7)  
6.1  
<Faxing (Optional)>  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
Mailbox: Used to store a received fax or originals in the machine  
memory which are ready to be polled. You can use a mailbox on  
the same machine you are using, or the one on a remote machine.  
Each mailbox has a corresponding mailbox number, name and  
password. (Page 6.9)  
5
Press OK.  
Sending a fax  
1
2
Press Fax from the Main screen.  
Back: Returns to the Basic tab.  
Place the originals face up in the DADF.  
Image tab  
Original Type: Enhances the fax quality based on the type of the  
original document being scanned. (Page 6.6)  
3
4
Adjust the document settings in the Image tab.  
Darkness: Adjusts the level of lightness or darkness of the fax.  
(Page 6.6)  
Select Duplex and Resolution options in the Basic tab.  
Erase Background: Reduces dark backgrounds or paper patterns  
as in newspaper originals. (Page 6.6)  
Note  
If the originals are printed on both sides of the paper, select  
2 Sided with left/right arrows in the Duplex feature.  
Color Mode: Selects whether the user sends the fax in mono or  
color. (Page 6.6)  
5
When the cursor is blinking in the input line, enter the fax number  
using the number keypad on the control panel. Or use Address on  
the right side of the screen, if you have stored frequently used fax  
numbers.  
Back: Returns to the Basic tab.  
Sending a fax  
This part explains how to send a fax, and the special methods of  
transmission.  
Note  
When you place the originals, you can use either the DADF or  
the scanner glass. (Page 4.1) If the originals are placed on both  
the DADF and the scanner glass, the machine will read the  
originals on the DADF first, which has higher priority in  
scanning.  
6
7
To add a number, press Add No.  
Setting the fax header  
Press Start on the control panel. The machine starts to scan and  
send a fax to destinations.  
In some countries, you are required by law to indicate your fax number  
on any fax you send.  
Note  
• When you want to cancel a fax job, press Stop before the  
machine start transmission. Or press the Job Status button,  
and select the job you want to delete, press Delete.  
1
2
Press Machine Setup on the control panel.  
Press Admin Setting. When the login message pops up, enter  
password and press OK. (Page 3.3)  
• If you used the scanner glass, the machine shows the  
message asking to place another page.  
• While the machine is sending a fax, you can not send an email  
at the same time. (Page 7.3)  
3
4
Press the Setup tab > Fax Setup > Terminal ID.  
Touch the input area to enter the machine name and your fax  
number.  
6.2  
<Faxing (Optional)>  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
               
5
Select Redial Time Interval and Redial Attempts.  
Sending a fax manually (On Hook Dial)  
1
2
Press Fax from the Main screen.  
Place the originals face up into the DADF.  
6
Press OK.  
Redialing the last number  
1
2
3
4
Press Fax from the Main screen.  
Adjust the document settings in the Image tab.  
Place the originals face up into the DADF.  
3
4
5
6
Adjust the document settings in the Image tab.  
Select Duplex and Resolution options in the Basic tab.  
Press On Hook Dial on the control panel.  
Press the Redial/Pause button on the control panel to show ten  
recent fax numbers.  
Enter a fax number using the number keypad on the control panel.  
5
Select a fax number in the list and press OK.  
• If the number is which you have dialed recently, press the Redial/  
Pause button on the control panel to show ten recent fax numbers  
and select a fax number.  
• The machine automatically begins to send.  
Delaying a fax transmission  
7
Press Start when you hear a high-pitched fax signal from the  
remote fax machine.  
You can set your machine to send a fax at a later time when you will not  
be present.  
Note  
1
2
3
4
5
6
Press Fax from the Main screen.  
Color faxes are only supported when faxes are sent manually.  
(Page 6.6)  
Place the originals face up in the DADF.  
Adjust the document settings in the Image tab and the Basic tab.  
Press the Advanced tab > Delay Send.  
Press On.  
Automatic resending  
When the number you have dialed is busy or there is no answer, the  
machine automatically redials the number.  
To change the time interval between redials and/or the number of redial  
attempts, refer to the next following steps.  
Enter Job Name using the keyboard on the display, select Start  
Time with left/right arrows.  
1
2
Press Machine Setup on the control panel.  
Select Admin Setting. When the login message pops up, then  
enter password and press OK. (Page 3.3)  
3
4
Press the Setup tab > Fax Setup.  
Press Redial.  
• If you do not enter Job Name, the machine assigns the job name  
as 'Fax Send Job xxx'. 'xxx' number are set in order.  
6.3  
<Faxing (Optional)>  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                 
Telephone: Receives a fax by pressing On Hook Dial and then  
Start.  
Note  
Start Time is the specific time you want the fax to be sent. You  
can set Start Time on a 24 hour basis and 15 minutes later than  
the current time. For example, if it is 1:00, then you can set the  
time starting from 1:15. If the set time is incorrect, the warning  
message will appear and the machine resets it to the current  
time.  
Fax: Answers an incoming fax call and immediately goes into the  
fax reception mode.  
Answering Machine/Fax: Is for when an answering machine  
attached to your machine. Your machine answers an incoming call,  
and the caller can leave a message on the answering machine. If  
the fax machine senses a fax tone on the line, the machine  
automatically switches to Fax mode to receive the fax.  
7
Press OK to start storing the scanned original data into memory.  
Note  
5
Press OK.  
To cancel delaying a fax, press Off before sending is activated.  
Note  
When the memory is full, the machine can no longer receive any  
incoming fax. Secure free memory to resume by removing data  
stored in the memory.  
Sending a priority fax  
This function is used when a high priority fax need to be sent ahead of  
reserved operations. The original is scanned into memory and  
immediately transmitted when the current operation is finished. In  
addition, priority transmission will interrupt a sending to multiple  
destinations between stations (example, when the transmission to station  
A ends, before transmission to station B begins) or between redial  
attempts.  
Receiving manually in Telephone mode  
You can receive a fax call by pressing On Hook Dial and then pressing  
Start when you hear a fax tone from the remote machine. The machine  
begins receiving a fax.  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Press Fax from the Main screen.  
Place the originals face up in the DADF.  
Adjust the document settings in the Image tab and the Basic tab.  
Press the Advanced tab > Priority Send.  
Press On.  
Receiving automatically in Answering Machine/  
Fax mode  
To use this mode, you must attache an answering machine to the EXT  
socket on the back of your machine. (Page 1.3)  
If the caller leaves a message, the answering machine stores the  
message as it would normally. If your machine detects a fax tone on the  
line, it automatically starts to receive the fax.  
Press OK.  
Note  
Press Start to start the urgent fax job.  
• If you have set your machine to this mode and your answering  
machine is switched off, or no answering machine is connected  
to EXT socket, your machine automatically goes into Fax mode  
after a predefined number of rings.  
• If your answering machine has a user-selectable ring counter,  
set the machine to answer incoming calls within 1 ring.  
• If you are in Telephone mode when the answering machine is  
connected to your machine, you must switch off the answering  
machine, or the outgoing message from the answering  
machine will interrupt your phone conversation.  
• While the machine is receiving a fax, you can not do the copy  
job.  
Receiving a fax  
This section explains how to receive a fax, and the special receiving  
methods available.  
Changing the receive modes  
Your machine is preset to Fax mode at the factory. When you receive a  
fax, the machine answers the call on a specified number of rings and  
automatically receives the fax. But if you want to change the Fax mode  
to another mode, refer to next steps.  
Receiving faxes manually using an extension  
telephone  
1
2
Press Machine Setup on the control panel.  
This feature works best when you are using an extension telephone  
connected to the EXT socket on the back of your machine. You can  
receive a fax from someone you are talking to on the extension  
telephone, without going to the fax machine.  
Select Admin Setting. When the login message pops up, then  
enter password and press OK. (Page 3.3)  
3
4
Press the Setup tab > Fax Setup > Fax Initial Setup > Receive  
Mode.  
When you receive a call on the extension phone and hear fax tones,  
press the keys  
fax.  
9
on the extension phone. The machine receives the  
Select the option.  
6.4  
<Faxing (Optional)>  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                         
Press the buttons slowly in sequence. If you still hear the fax tone from  
the remote machine, try pressing once again.  
Long Edge: Prints both sides of the paper, however the binding  
will be the long edge.  
9
Short Edge: Prints both sides of the paper, however the binding  
will be the short edge.  
To change the to, for example, , follow the next steps.  
9
3
1
2
Press Machine Setup on the control panel.  
5
Press OK.  
Select Admin Setting. When the login message pops up, then  
enter password and press OK. (Page 3.3)  
Receiving faxes in memory  
3
4
5
Press the Setup tab > Fax Setup > Remote Code.  
Select On.  
Since your machine is a multi-tasking device, it can receive faxes while  
you are making copies or printing. If you receive a fax while you are  
copying or printing, your machine stores incoming faxes in its memory.  
Then, as soon as you finish copying or printing, the machine  
automatically prints the fax.  
Press left/right arrows to display number 3.  
Adjusting the document settings  
6
Press OK.  
Before sending a fax, you can adjust the document settings, such as  
resolution, darkness, color, duplex and so forth. Refer to explanation of  
this section.  
Receiving in secure receiving mode  
Note  
You may need to prevent your received faxes from being accessed by  
unauthorized people. You can turn on secure receiving mode to restrict  
printing of received faxes when the machine is unattended. In secure  
receiving mode, all incoming faxes go into memory.  
The document setting herein is for only current job. If you want  
to change the default setting on document settings, refer to  
Admin Setting > General tab > Default Settings. (Page 9.2)  
1
2
Press Machine Setup on the control panel.  
Duplex  
Select Admin Setting. When the login message pops up, then  
enter password and press OK. (Page 3.3)  
This function is especially intended for two-sided originals. You can select  
whether the machine sends the fax on one side or both sides of the paper.  
3
4
5
Press the Setup tab > Fax Setup > Secure Receive.  
Load the originals onto the DADF to use this function.  
Press Fax > the Basic tab > Duplex. Use left/right arrows to toggle the  
value.  
Select On.  
Enter Passcode with 4 digit number using the number keypad on  
the control panel.  
Note  
To deactivate the Secure Receive feature, press Off. In this  
case, the received fax will be printed out.  
1 Sided: Is for the originals that are printed on one side only.  
2 Sided: Is for the originals that are printed on both sides.  
Printing received faxes on both sides of the paper  
Resolution  
Set this duplex feature to save paper. When the machine prints the  
received fax data, it prints them on both sides of the paper.  
Changing the resolution setting affects the appearance of the received  
document.  
1
2
Press Machine Setup on the control panel.  
Press Fax > the Basic tab > Resolution. Use left/right arrows to toggle  
the values.  
Select Admin Setting. When the login message pops up, then  
enter password and press OK. (Page 3.3)  
3
4
Press the Setup tab > Fax Setup > Output Option > Duplex.  
Select appropriate option.  
Standard: Usually recommended for originals with text. This  
option will reduce the transmission time.  
Off: Prints only one side of the paper.  
6.5  
<Faxing (Optional)>  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                           
Fine: Recommended for the originals containing with small  
characters, thin lines, or text that was printed using a dot-matrix  
printer.  
Setting up a fax phonebook  
Use this feature to store destination names, fax numbers and  
transmission settings in your machine. There are two options, Individual  
and Group.  
Super Fine: Recommended for originals containing with extremely  
fine detail, this option is enabled only if the receiving machine also  
supports a Super Fine resolution.  
Note  
For memory transmission, Super Fine mode is not available.  
The resolution setting is automatically changed to Fine.  
Individual: Stores up to 200 fax numbers. And the fax numbers which  
are stored in Individual work as Speed Dial No..  
Group: Makes groups when you frequently send the same document  
to several destinations. You can store up to 100 group dial numbers.  
Entries stored here will be available for selection within the sending list  
on the Basic tab of Fax. Dialing Group can be also setup comprising  
of many Individual entries.  
Original Type  
You can set the original document type to enhance the quality of a  
document being scanned.  
Press Fax > the Image tab > Original Type. Select the appropriate  
option on the screen and press OK.  
The fax numbers, which are stored in Individual, work as Speed Dial  
No..  
Text: For originals with text or line art.  
Text/Photo: For originals with both text and photographs together.  
Photo: For originals that are continuous tone photographs.  
Storing individual fax numbers (Speed Dial No.)  
1
Press Fax > the Basic tab > Individual.  
Darkness  
You can select the degree of darkness of the original document.  
Press Fax > the Image tab > Darkness. Press the right arrow to enhance  
the darkness degree and press OK.  
Edit: Changes the ID, Speed Dial No., and Fax No..  
New: Creates the new Speed Dial No..  
Erase Background  
You can lighten, reduce or delete the dark backgrounds from scanned  
colored paper or newspaper originals.  
Delete: Deletes the selected Speed Dial No..  
Search: Searches the fax number which currently stored in  
Individual phonebook. When the keyboard pops up, enter ID.  
Press Fax > the Image tab > Erase Background. Press On to activate  
this function and press OK.  
Detail: Shows ID, Fax No. and Included group information if it is  
grouped. (Page 6.6)  
Note  
Erase Background is disabled if the Original Type is set to  
Photo.  
Apply: Inputs the selected fax number to the sending fax number  
list in the Basic tab.  
Cancel: Cancels the current job and goes to the previous screen.  
Color Mode  
2
Press New.  
You can transmit a fax in color using this feature. But this feature only  
applies when you send a fax using On Hook Dial on the control panel.  
Press Fax > the Image tab > Color Mode. Select option and OK.  
Mono: Transmits a fax in black and white.  
Color: Transmits a fax in color.  
Note  
Color Mode faxes are only supported when faxes are sent  
manually. (Page 6.3)  
6.6  
<Faxing (Optional)>  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                           
3
Enter the name of the fax number in the ID field with the pop up  
keyboard, and the fax number in the Fax No. area using the number  
keypad on the control panel.  
7
Press OK to save the numbers.  
Setting up a fax phonebook using SyncThru Web  
Service  
You can store fax numbers conveniently from the networked computer  
using SyncThru Web Service.  
1
2
Open the web browser in your computer.  
Enter IP address of your machine, then SyncThru Web Service  
shows.  
ID: Enters the name.  
(Example. http://123.123.123.123)  
Speed Dial No.: Is automatically filled with the first free number. If  
you want to assign to a different number, use left/right arrows.  
3
4
Press Machine Settings > Fax Setup > Fax Phone Book.  
Select Speed Dial (Individual).  
Fax No.: Enters a fax numbers, only the numbers, with the area  
code if necessary.  
Note  
4
Press OK.  
Fax numbers are already stored in Speed Dial (Individual) can  
be used when selecting.  
Storing Group fax numbers (Group No.)  
5
6
Press Add.  
1
2
3
Press Fax > the Basic tab > Group.  
Enter Index, Name and Phone Number. Index you enter here will be  
the Speed Dial No. in the display screen of your machine.  
Press New.  
Press the input area in Group Dial ID, then the keyboard pops up,  
7
Press Apply.  
enter the name.  
Note  
4
Select Group Dial No. with left/right arrows.  
Speed Dial numbers can be imported from an *.csv file.  
Using the polling option  
Polling is used when one fax machine requests another to send a  
document. This is useful when the person with the original document is  
not in the office. The person who wants to receive the document, calls the  
machine holding where the original is stored and requests that the  
document be sent. In other words, it "polls" the machine holding that has  
the original.  
Group Dial ID: Enters the group name.  
Group Dial No.: Is automatically filled with the first free number. If  
you want to assign to a different number, use left/right arrows.  
5
6
Press OK.  
Note  
To use this feature, both the sender and receiver must have the  
polling feature.  
Select an entry from Speed Dial List, and press Add. Repeat this  
step until you added entries you need.  
The polling process is as follows:  
1
2
3
Sender stores the originals in the machine. (Page 6.8)  
Sender gives the Passcode to the receiver.  
Receiver dials the fax number and enters the Passcode when  
requested. (Page 6.8)  
4
Receiver presses Start to receive the stored fax.  
Make sure the selected Speed Dial List is copied to the left pane,  
Group list.  
6.7  
<Faxing (Optional)>  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
2
Press the Advanced tab > Polling > Poll from Remote.  
Storing the originals for polling  
1
2
Press Fax from the Main screen.  
Place the originals face up in the DADF. Or you can use the scanner  
glass with a single original document, face down.  
3
4
Adjust the document settings in the Image tab and the Basic tab.  
Press the Advanced tab > Polling > Store.  
Note  
Your can use Delay Poll From Remote to poll the fax at a  
specific time within 24 hours.  
3
4
Enter Passcode and destination fax number using the number  
keypad on the control panel. You have to be informed Passcode  
from sender with the remote fax machine.  
Press OK.  
5
Press the input area then the pop up keyboard, enter Passcode  
(The four-digit number which you have to inform the receiver). If you  
do not want to set Passcode, enter number 0000 here. Then you  
can store, delete, print and receive a fax for polling without any  
passcode.  
Polling from a remote Mailbox  
This option allows you to retrieve (poll) a fax which is stored in the  
Mailbox of on the remote machine. Before you start polling, you must be  
informed of Mailbox No. and Passcode from the sender. (Page 6.9)  
Note  
If you want to use the Mailbox, refer to Storing the originals in  
the Mailbox. (Page 6.9)  
1
2
Press Fax from the Main screen.  
Press the Advanced tab > Mailbox > Poll from Remote.  
6
Select the Delete On Print option. If you select Off, the sent fax  
data will be remained in the machine’s memory even after it’s  
printing. If you select On, the fax data will be deleted at the printing  
point.  
7
8
Press OK to start to store the originals into memory for polling.  
Give the Passcode to the receiver.  
Printing (Deleting) the polling document  
1
2
3
4
Press Fax from the Main screen.  
Press the Advanced tab > Polling > Print (or Delete).  
Enter Passcode  
3
Enter Remote Fax No, Mailbox No., and Passcode. All these field  
are filled with information from the sender.  
Press OK.  
Polling a remote fax  
This option allows you to retrieve (poll) a fax which is stored in the remote  
machine.  
1
Press Fax from the Main screen.  
Note  
You can use Delay Poll From Remote to poll a fax from the  
remote machine's Mailbox at certain time within 24 hours.  
4
Press OK.  
6.8  
<Faxing (Optional)>  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                       
12 Set Notification option to On, if you want to be notified when a fax  
Using Mailbox  
is received into Mailbox.  
You can store the original data in Mailbox, since you are absent and the  
receiver need to be retrieve a fax from you. This feature allows you to  
program up to 15 individual Mailbox. Before you store the originals, the  
Mailbox must be created.  
13 Press OK.  
Since you created the mailbox, you can store originals in it.  
Creating Mailbox  
1
2
Press Fax from the Main screen.  
1
2
Press Machine Setup on the control panel.  
Place the originals face up in the DADF. Or you can use the scanner  
glass with a single original document faced down.  
Select Admin Setting. When the login message pops up, then  
enter the password and press OK.  
3
4
Adjust the document settings in the Image tab and the Basic tab.  
3
4
5
6
Press the Setup tab > Fax Setup.  
Press the down arrow to scroll down, if necessary.  
Press Mailbox Setup.  
Press the Advanced tab > Mailbox > Store.  
Press Mailbox Configuration. Then the screen displays Mailbox  
List.  
7
8
9
Select a Mailbox on the Mailbox List.  
5
Enter Mailbox No. and Passcode which are set from Creating  
Mailbox in page 6.9.  
Press Edit Mailbox.  
6
Press OK.  
Note  
Deleting the data in a specific Mailbox  
Press Fax > the Advanced tab > Mailbox > Delete, enter  
Mailbox No. and Passcode, and then press OK. When the  
confirmation window appears, press Yes to complete the job.  
Press Mailbox ID and enter ID with number keypad on the control  
panel. Up to 20 numbers you can enter.  
Printing a Mailbox  
Press Fax > the Advanced tab > Mailbox > Print, enter  
Mailbox No. and Passcode, and press OK.  
10 Enter Mailbox Name with the pop up keyboard. It can be either  
alphabet or number up to 20 digits.  
Faxing to a remote Mailbox  
11 Enter Mailbox Passcode with the numeric keypad on the control  
To fax and store the originals in a recipient's Mailbox in this machine, you  
panel.  
can use the Send to Remote feature.  
Note  
1
2
Press Fax from the Main screen.  
If you set Mailbox Passcode to number 0000, then the  
machine does not ask passcode for using Mailbox, such as  
storing, deleting, printing, receiving.  
Place the originals face up in the DADF. Or you can use the scanner  
glass with a single original document face down.  
6.9  
<Faxing (Optional)>  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                       
3
4
5
Adjust the document settings in the Image tab and the Basic tab.  
2
Press Admin Setting. When the login message pops up, enter  
password and press OK. (Page 3.3)  
Press the Advanced tab > Mailbox > Send to Remote.  
3
4
5
6
Press the Setup tab > Fax Setup.  
Press down arrow on the right side.  
Press Toll Save.  
Enter Remote Fax No, Mailbox No., and Passcode. All these field  
are filled with information from the receiver.  
Press On.  
6
Press OK.  
Printing a report after sending a fax  
7
Press Start Time and set the start date and time with left/right  
arrows.  
You can set the machine to print a report whether a fax transmission is  
successfully completed or not.  
8
9
Press OK.  
Press End Time and set the end date and time with left/right arrows.  
Note  
The detailed information is available in advanced setup  
part. (Page 9.7)  
10 Press OK.  
11 Press OK.  
1
2
Press Machine Setup on the control panel.  
Press Admin Setting. When the login message pops up, enter  
password and press OK. (Page 3.3)  
Adding documents to a reserved delay fax job  
3
4
Press the Print/Report tab > Report > Fax Report > Fax Send  
Report.  
You can add additional documents to the delayed fax job which is saved  
in memory.  
Press On.  
1
2
Press Machine Setup on the control panel.  
Press Admin Setting. When the login message pops up, enter  
password and press OK. (Page 3.3)  
3
4
5
6
7
Press the Setup tab > Fax Setup.  
Press down arrow on the right side.  
Press Send Batch.  
Press On.  
5
Press OK.  
Press OK.  
• When you send a fax, if a fax number is same as the number in  
delay fax, the machine asks whether you want to add more  
documents to reserved delay fax.  
Sending a fax in toll save time  
You can set the machine to send a fax in toll save time to save a  
telephone fee. If you send a fax after setting this feature, fax data will be  
stored in machine's memory and the machine will start to send fax in toll  
save time.  
1
Press Machine Setup on the control panel.  
6.10  
<
Faxing (Optional)>  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Forwarding a sent fax to other destination by an  
email  
Forwarding a received fax to other destination  
You can set the machine to forward the received or sent fax to other  
destination by a fax or an email. If you are out of office but have to receive  
the fax, this feature may be useful.  
1
2
Press Machine Setup on the control panel.  
Press Admin Setting. When the login message pops up, enter  
password and press OK. (Page 3.3)  
Note  
• When you forward a fax by an email, you firstly set the mail  
server and IP address in SyncThru Web Service.  
3
4
5
Press the Setup tab > Fax Setup.  
Press down arrow on the right side.  
• If this Fax Forward Settings feature to On, you cannot use a  
fax with the On Hook Dial button on the control panel.  
Press Fax Forward Settings > Forward to Email Setting > Send  
Forward.  
Forwarding a sent fax to other destination by a fax  
6
7
Press On.  
You can set the machine to forward every fax you sent to other  
destination by faxing.  
Enter the From and Destination Email option using the keyboard  
on the display.  
1
2
Press Machine Setup on the control panel.  
8
Press OK.  
Press Admin Setting. When the login message pops up, enter  
password and press OK. (Page 3.3)  
Forwarding a received fax to other destination by  
an email  
3
4
5
Press the Setup tab > Fax Setup.  
Press down arrow on the right side.  
1
2
Press Machine Setup on the control panel.  
Press Fax Forward Settings > Forward to Fax Setting > Send  
Forward.  
Press Admin Setting. When the login message pops up, enter  
password and press OK. (Page 3.3)  
6
7
Press On and enter a fax number using the keypad on the control  
panel.  
3
4
5
Press the Setup tab > Fax Setup.  
Press down arrow on the right side.  
Press OK.  
Press Fax Forward Settings > Forward to Email Setting >  
Receive Forward.  
Forwarding a received fax to other destination by  
a fax  
6
Press Forward and enter the From and Destination Email option  
using the keyboard on the display.  
With this feature, you can forward every fax you received to other  
destination by faxing. When the machine receives a fax, a fax is stored in  
the memory then, the machine sends it to the destination you have set.  
• If you want the machine to print the report after forwarding a fax,  
set the Forward & Print option to On.  
7
Press OK.  
1
2
Press Machine Setup on the control panel.  
Press Admin Setting. When the login message pops up, enter  
password and press OK. (Page 3.3)  
3
4
5
Press the Setup tab > Fax Setup.  
Press down arrow on the right side.  
Press Fax Forward Settings > Forward to Fax Setting > Receive  
Forward.  
6
Press Forward and enter a fax number using the keypad on the  
control panel.  
• If you want the machine to print the report after forwarding a fax,  
set the Forward & Print option to On.  
7
Press OK.  
6.11  
<
Faxing (Optional)>  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
Understanding the Scan screen  
7 Scanning  
To use the scanning feature, press Scan on the Main screen. If the  
Scanning with your machine lets you turn hard copy originals into digital  
files.  
screen displays an other menu, press (  
) to go to the Main screen.  
directly connect the machine with your computer, and the other is using  
via the network.  
If you want to use the USB cable to scan originals, refer to the Scanning  
part of Software section. Your machine offers the following ways to scan  
an image using a local connection.  
• Via one of the preset imaging applications. Scanning an image  
launches the selected application, enabling you to control the  
scanning process.  
Note  
If the message asking Auth. ID and Password, it means the  
network administrator has set the authentication in SyncThru  
Web Service.(Page 10.6)  
• Via the SmarThru program supplied with your machine.  
• Via the Windows Image Acquisition (WIA) driver.  
Press Scan to Email, NetScan or Scan to Server.  
If you want to use the network scan feature, press Scan on the display to  
open three options of Scan to Email, NetScan and Scan to Server.  
This chapter gives you information about the scanning method and the  
different ways to send the scanned file to the destination.  
This chapter includes:  
Understanding the Scan screen  
Scanning originals and sending through email (Scan to Email)  
Scanning originals and sending via Samsung Network Scan  
Manager (NetScan)  
Scan to Email: Scans and sends the scanned output to the  
destination by email. (Page 7.3)  
Scanning originals and sending via SMB/ FTP (Scan to Server)  
Changing the scan feature settings  
NetScan: Scans and sends the scanned output to the destination  
with the Samsung Network Scan Manager program. (Page 7.5)  
Scan to Server: Scans and sends the scanned output to the  
destination with SMB and FTP. (Page 7.5)  
Basic tab  
This section explains the Basic tab of Scan to Email and Scan to  
Server, and NetScan's basic screen.  
Scan to Email  
From: Sender's email address.  
To/Cc/Bcc: Recipients' addresses. Cc is for copies to an  
additional recipient and Bcc is for the same as Cc but without their  
name be displayed.  
7.1  
<Scanning>  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Subject/Message: Subject and message of the email.  
Back: Returns to the previous screen.  
Remove All: Erases everything in the input area.  
Advanced tab  
Address: Inputs the recipient's address just by pressing stored  
addresses. You can store frequently used email addresses from  
your computer using the SyncThru Web Service. (Page 7.3)  
Duplex: Selects whether the machine scans on one side of the  
paper (1 Sided), both sides of the paper (2 Sided), or both sides of  
paper but back is rotated 180 degrees (2 Sided, Rotate Side 2).  
Resolution: Selects the scanning resolution value.  
Back: Returns to the previous screen. If the network  
authentication is enabled, the log off confirmation message popes  
up and closes Scan to Email.  
Original Size: Sets the originals to a specific fixed size. (Page 7.7)  
NetScan  
Back: Returns to the previous screen.  
If the authentication for network appears, you have to enter user name  
and password to enter the NetScan screen.  
Image tab  
Number: Lists the number in order for application programs.  
Original Type: Selects whether the original is text or photo.  
(Page 7.7)  
Application: Shows the available application programs from your  
computer.  
Color Mode: Adjusts the color options of the scan output. If the  
original is color and you want to scan in color, press Color Mode.  
(Page 7.7)  
Select: Moves to the application program you have selected.  
Scan to Server  
Darkness: Adjusts the degree of darkness of the scan output. Use  
left/right arrow to adjust the values. (Page 7.8)  
Erase Background: Erases backgrounds like paper patterns.  
(Page 7.8)  
Scan to Edge: Scans originals from edge-to-edge. (Page 7.8)  
Back: Returns to the previous screen.  
Output tab  
SMB: Sends the scanned file to SMB. Press SMB for that option.  
FTP: Sends the scanned file to FTP. Press FTP for that option.  
No.: Index number which you entered in SyncThru Web Service.  
(Page 7.5)  
Server: Alias name which you entered in SyncThru Web Service.  
(Page 7.5)  
Duplex: Selects whether the machine scans on one side of the  
paper (1 Sided), both sides of the paper (2 Sided), or both sides of  
paper but back is rotated 180 degrees (2 Sided, Rotate Side 2).  
Quality: Adjusts the display quality of the scan output. (Page 7.8)  
File Format: Selects the file format of the scan output. (Page 7.8)  
Resolution: Selects the scanning resolution value.  
7.2  
<Scanning>  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
Scan Preset: Automatically changes some scan options such as  
file format, resolution, and more. You can adjust options to fit each  
specific purpose. (Page 7.8)  
To/Cc/Bcc: Recipient's email address manually with the pop up  
keyboard, or by pressing Local or Global. Local or Global  
addresses are pre-loaded address lists from your computer or the  
LDAP server which is configured at Web UI. (Page 7.4)  
Back: Returns to the previous screen.  
Subject: Title of email.  
Message: Enters the text which will be as the contents of the  
email. The maximum size is 1KB.  
Scanning originals and sending through email  
(Scan to Email)  
Note  
To delete previously entered contents, press Remove All.  
You can scan the originals and email the scanned image to several  
destinations from the machine by email.  
6
7
Set the scan quality by Duplex and Resolution.  
Sending a scanned image to several destinations  
as an email attachment  
Duplex: Sets this option for originals that are printed on one side  
only, or on both sides.  
Resolution: Sets the scanning resolution by pressing left/right  
arrows.  
1
Place the originals face up in the DADF. Or you can use the scanner  
glass for one sheet of paper.  
Press the Start button to scan and send the file.  
Note  
While the machine is sending an email, you cannot do the copy  
job either sending a fax.  
Storing email addresses  
There are two kinds of email addresses - Local on your machine's  
memory and Global on the LDAP server - which differ depending on  
where they are stored. Local is that email addresses are stored in the  
machine's memory, and Global is that email addresses are stored in the  
certain (LDAP) server.  
2
Press Scan from the Main screen.  
Through the SyncThru Web Service, you can easily enter and store  
email addresses from your computer.  
Note  
If the authentication message shows, enter User Name  
and Password. This message shows only when the network  
administrator has set the authentication in SyncThru Web  
Service. (Page 10.6)  
Individual  
1
2
3
4
Turn your networked computer on and open the web browser.  
Enter your machine's IP address as the URL in a browser.  
Click Go to access the SyncThru Web Service.  
3
4
Press Scan to Email.  
Set the scan features in the Advanced, Image, or Output tabs.  
(Page 7.2)  
Click Machine Settings > E-mail Setup > Individual Address  
Book. Then the screen shows Individual Address Book on the  
right side of the screen.  
5
Press the Basic tab to enter the email address.  
5
6
Click Add.  
When the Add E-Mail screen appears, select the Index number,  
enter User Name and E-mail Address.  
7
8
Click Apply.  
Check if the emails are correctly stored and listed on your machine  
by pressing Local > the Individual tab.  
From: Sender's address. Touch From and then the keyboard pops  
up on the screen. Use the pop up keyboard to enter your email  
addresses. Or you can use Local and Global to enter the  
addresses easily. (Page 7.4)  
7.3  
<Scanning>  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                 
Group  
Entering email addresses by the address book  
1
2
3
Access to the SyncThru Web Service from your computer.  
Once you have stored the frequently used addresses into the address  
book, you can simply enter email addresses.  
Make sure you have configured Individual Address Book.  
1
Press Local or Global from the Basic tab of Scan to Email.  
Click Machine Settings > E-mail Setup > Group Address Book.  
Then the screen shows Group Address Book on the right side.  
4
5
6
7
8
Click Add.  
Select the Group number and enter Group Name.  
Select email addresses by clicking the check boxes.  
Click Apply.  
Check if the email addresses are correctly stored and listed on your  
machine by pressing Group.  
The search window shows.  
2
Press the initial alphabet key of the address you are looking for. Or  
press Search to specify the search criteria.  
Global  
Email addresses which are stored in Global in your machine are  
processed by the LDAP server.  
1
2
3
4
Turn your networked computer on and open the web browser.  
Enter your machine's IP address as the URL in a browser.  
Click Go to access the SyncThru Web Service.  
Click Machine Settings > LDAP Server Setup. Then the LDAP  
Server screen shows on the right side.  
When the search is completed, the screen displays the search  
results.  
5
Enter IP Address or Host Name or Host Name and LDAP server  
and Port.  
3
4
Press From and enter your email address and press OK.  
6
7
Enter optional information.  
Select the address you want in the right-hand pane, and the press  
To, Cc or Bcc in the left-hand pane.  
Click Apply.  
5
6
Press Apply. Keep selecting addresses as many as you want.  
Note  
The LDAP server administrator must store the email address  
data. The method of storing is varies depending on the server  
and the operating systems.  
Press OK.  
Entering email addresses by the keyboard  
When you press the input field in the From, To, Cc, or message input field,  
the keyboard shows on the display screen.  
The following explanation is the example that you are entering  
1
Press From in the Basic tab of the Scan to Email.  
7.4  
<Scanning>  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
2
3
4
5
Press a, b, c, d, e, f, g.  
Press @.  
Your machine is added to the scanner list of the Network Scan  
program and you can now scan images through the network.  
Note  
Press a, b, c.  
You can change the scanner properties of your machine and the  
scan settings from the Samsung Network Scan Manager  
window. Click Properties and set the options in each tab.  
Press . and press c, o, m.  
Note  
to enter contents in other fields, press  
keyboard.  
on the  
Scanning and sending via NetScan  
1
Make sure that your machine and the computer are connected to a  
network and Samsung Network Scan Manager is running on the  
computer.  
6
Press OK after finishing all the contents.  
2
3
Place the originals face up in the DADF. Or you can place a single  
original document face down on the scanner glass.  
Scanning originals and sending via Samsung  
Network Scan Manager (NetScan)  
Press Scan from the Main screen.  
You can scan an image on the machine via the Network Scan program  
which is installed in your networked computer.  
Note  
If the authentication message shows, enter User Name  
and Password. This message shows only when the network  
administrator has set the authentication in SyncThru Web  
Service. (Page 10.6)  
Preparation for network scanning  
Make sure the printer software is installed on your computer using the  
Printer Software CD-ROM, since the printer software and should include  
the Network Scan program. See page 3.2 for detailed information on  
installation steps.  
4
5
Press NetScan.  
When the authentication message pops up, enter ID and  
Password. ID and Password that are which you have entered  
during the configuration of the Network Scan program. (Page 7.5)  
1
In Windows, select Start  
>
Programs > Samsung Network Printer  
Utilities > Network Scan > Network Scan.  
When login is completed, the screen shows the NetScan server  
address which is the networked computer. Additionally, this shows  
Application list that is configured in Samsung Network Scan  
Manager.  
The Samsung Network Scan Manager window opens.  
2
3
4
Click the Add Device button.  
Click Next.  
6
7
8
Select one from the application list and press Select.  
Press Start on the control panel to start scanning.  
The original will be scanned and sent to your computer.  
Select Connect to this scanner and enter the IP address of your  
machine.  
Or select Browse for a scanner. (recommended) to show a list of  
scanners on your network.  
5
6
Click Next.  
Scanning originals and sending via SMB/ FTP  
(Scan to Server)  
Select your machine from the list and enter a name, user ID, and  
PIN (Personal Identification Number) for the machine.  
You can scan an image and send it to a total of 5 destinations via the SMB  
or FTP.  
Note  
• The model name of your machine is automatically entered as  
the scanner name, but it can be changed upon your need.  
Preparation for scanning to SMB/FTP  
• The ID can be entered up to 8 characters. The first character  
must be a letter.  
Select the folder and share it with the machine in order to receive the  
scanned file.  
• The PIN must be of 4 digits.  
Click Next.  
Note  
7
8
The next steps are for SMB server setting using SyncThru Web  
Service, and the setting for FTP server is the same as SMB.  
Apply the same steps for setting up the FTP server.  
Click Finish.  
7.5  
<Scanning>  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                     
1
2
3
4
Turn your networked computer on and open the web browser.  
Enter your machine's IP address as the URL in a browser.  
Click Go to access the SyncThru Web Service.  
6
Press Scan to Server to show the SMB server list you entered in  
the SyncThru Web Service.  
Click Machine Settings > SMB Setup > Server List. The Server  
List is then displayed on the right side of the screen.  
5
6
7
Click Add.  
Select the index number from 1 to 20.  
Enter a name in Alias for the Setup for the corresponding Server  
List entry. This name will be displayed on your machine.  
7
8
Select the destination SMB server.  
8
9
Select IP Address or Host Name.  
Note  
You can select up to five destinations using both of SMB or  
FTP servers.  
Enter the server address in dotted decimal notation or a host name.  
10 Enter the server port number, from 1 to 65535.  
Press Start on the control panel.  
The default port number is 139.  
The machine begins scanning and then sends the scanned image to  
the specified server.  
11 Enter the share name of the server.  
12 Put a check mark next to in Anonymous if you want to allow the  
SMB server to be accessed by unauthorized persons.  
Changing the scan feature settings  
By default, this is unchecked.  
This part explains how to adjust the document settings for each scan job,  
such as resolution, duplex, original size, type, color mode, darkness, and  
more. The options you change will be maintained for a certain time, but  
after that period, the options will be reset to default values.  
13 Enter the login name and password.  
14 Enter the domain name of the SMB server.  
15 Enter the location for storing the scanned image. This is the location  
you entered in step 7.  
Duplex  
This feature especially applies when the original documents to be  
scanned are two-sided. You can select whether the machine scans only  
one side of the paper or both sides of the paper.  
16 Click Apply.  
Scanning and sending to SMB/FTP server  
Press Scan > Scan to Email (Or Scan to Server) > the Basic tab >  
Duplex. Use left/right arrows to toggle the values.  
1
Press Scan from the Main screen.  
Note  
If the authentication message shows, enter User Name  
and Password. This message shows only when the network  
administrator has set the authentication in SyncThru Web  
Service. (Page 10.6)  
1 Sided: For originals that are printed on one side only.  
2 Sided: For originals that are printed on both sides.  
2
3
Press Scan to Server.  
2 Sided, Rotate Side 2: For originals that are printed on both  
sides. But the back is rotated 180 degrees.  
Place the originals face up in the DADF. Or you can place a single  
original document face down on the scanner glass.  
Note  
To use 2 Sided and 2 Sided, Rotate Side 2, you have to load  
the originals on the DADF. Because, if the machine can not  
detect the original on DADF, automatically changes the option to  
1 Sided.  
4
5
Adjust the document settings in the Image tab.  
Select Duplex and Resolution in the Basic tab.  
7.6  
<Scanning>  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Resolution  
Original Type  
You can adjust document resolution.  
You can set the original document type in order to enhance the quality of  
a document being scanned.  
Press Scan > Scan to Email (Or Scan to Server) > the Basic tab >  
Resolution. Use left/right arrows to toggle the values. The higher value  
you select the clear result you get. But the scanning time may take longer.  
Press Scan > Scan to Email (Or Scan to Server) > the Image tab >  
Original Type. Select the appropriate option and press OK.  
Commonly, 400 dpi and 600 dpi resolution are available only when Color  
mode is set to Mono. The following table shows detailed information  
feature, resolution and file format options.  
Text: For originals that have text or line art.  
Feature  
Resolution (dpi)  
File Format  
Text/Photo: For originals that have both text and photographs  
together.  
Scan to Email  
100, 200, 300, 400,  
600  
PDF, Single-Page  
TIFF, Multi-Page TIFF,  
JPEG  
Photo: For originals that are continuous tone photographs.  
NetScan  
100, 200, 300  
PDF, TIFF, JPEG  
Color Mode  
Scan to Server  
100, 200, 300, 400,  
600  
PDF, Single-Page  
TIFF, Multi-Page TIFF,  
JPEG  
Use this option to scan the original in Mono, Gray or Color mode.  
Press Scan > Scan to Email (Or Scan to Server) > the Image tab >  
Color Mode. Select the appropriate option and press OK.  
Original Size  
You can specify the scanning area on the originals by selecting the pre-  
defined size, or putting in the margin value or Auto. If you set this option  
to Auto, the machine senses and determines the size of the original.  
Press Scan > Scan to Email (Or Scan to Server) > the Advanced tab  
> Original Size. Use up/down arrows to go to the next screen. Select the  
appropriate option and press OK.  
Color: Uses color to display an image. 24 bits per pixel, 8 bits for  
each RGB, is used for 1 pixel.  
Gray: Uses the black gradation to display an image. 8 bits per  
pixel.  
Mono: Displays an image in black and white. 1 bit per pixel.  
7.7  
<Scanning>  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                   
Darkness  
File Format  
You can select the degree of darkness of the scanned output. If your  
original document is light or faded, press the right arrow to make the  
output darker.  
You can select the file format before you proceed with the scanning job.  
Press Scan > Scan to Email (Or Scan to Server) > the Output tab > File  
Format.  
Press Scan > Scan to Email (Or Scan to Server) > the Image tab >  
Darkness. Press right arrow to enhance the darkness degree then, press  
OK.  
Erase Background  
PDF: Scans originals in PDF format.  
Single-Page TIFF: Scans originals in TIFF (Tagged Image File  
Format), but several originals are scanned as one file.  
You can lighten, reduce or deletes the dark background from scanning  
colored paper or newspaper originals.  
Multi-Page TIFF: Scans the originals in TIFF (Tagged Image File  
Format), and several originals are scanned as several file.  
Press Scan > Scan to Email (Or Scan to Server) > the Image tab >  
Erase Background. Select On and press OK.  
JPEG: Scans original in JPEG format.  
Scan to Edge  
Note  
The file format JPEG cannot be selected if Mono has been  
selected for Color Mode, and Text has been selected for  
Original Type.  
You can set the machine to scan full size of a page as it is. Usually, the  
machine scans a page except edges, which means the margin,  
especially when you do the copy job with certain sized paper in the tray.  
But if you scan and sent it right away via the network, as the file, the  
machine does not need to exclude the edges from the originals.  
Scan Preset  
Press Scan > Scan to Email (Or Scan to Server) > the Image tab >  
Scan to Edge. Select On and press OK.  
This feature allows you to use optimized settings for your specific scan  
job.  
Press Scan > Scan to Email (Or Scan to Server) > the Output tab >  
Scan Preset.  
Quality  
You can use this option to produce a high quality document. Higher  
quality you select a larger file size you get.  
Press Scan > Scan to Email (Or Scan to Server) > the Output tab >  
Quality.  
Sharing and Printing: Produces a small-sized file for normal  
quality documents.  
High Quality Printing: Set this option for high quality output with  
the largest file size.  
Archival Record: For the electronic file which is of the smallest file  
size of the output.  
Note  
When you set Color Mode to Mono, the Quality option is  
grayed out.  
OCR: Produces scanned output for OCR software. You can expect  
the highest quality images.  
Simple Scan: Used for a simple document with text only. The file  
size of output is small.  
Custom: Applies the current scan settings that you have chosen.  
7.8  
<Scanning>  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                           
4
From the Document menu, select Cancel Printing (Windows 98/  
Me) or Cancel (Windows NT 4.0/2000/XP/2003).  
8 Basic printing  
Note  
This chapter explains common printing tasks.  
You can also access this window by simply double-clicking the  
printer icon at the bottom right corner of the Windows desktop.  
You can also cancel the current job by pressing Stop on the control panel.  
Printing a document  
Your machine allows you to print from various Windows, Macintosh, or  
Linux applications. The exact steps for printing a document may vary  
depending on the application you use.  
1
2
Open the document you want to print.  
Select Print from the File menu. The Print window is displayed. It  
may look slightly different depending on your application.  
Make sure that your  
printer is selected.  
3
4
Select your printer driver from the Selet Printer drop-down list.  
To start the print job, click OK or Print in the Print window.  
For details about printing, see Software section.  
Canceling a print job  
If the print job is waiting in a print queue or print spooler, such as the  
printer group in Windows, delete the job as follows:  
1
2
Click the Windows Start menu.  
For Windows 98/Me/NT 4.0/2000, select Settings and then  
Printers.  
For Windows XP/2003, select Printers and Faxes.  
3
Double-click the Samsung SCX-6x45 Series PCL 6 icon. (Or  
Samsung SCX-6x45 Series PS)  
8.1  
<Basic printing>  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Machine Status screen  
9 Machine status and advanced  
setup  
Press Machine Setup on the control panel and press Machine Status.  
This chapter explains how to browse the current status of your machine,  
and the method of setting for the advanced machine setup. Please read  
this chapter carefully in order to use your machine's diverse features.  
This chapter includes:  
Machine Setup  
Browsing the machine’s status  
General settings  
Copy Setup  
Supplies Life tab: Displays the remainders or the usage count of  
the machine supplies. Use up/down arrows to switch screens.  
Machine Info tab: Displays the detailed information about the  
machine, and some options allows for validating your machine.  
(Page 9.1)  
Fax Setup  
Network Setup  
Authentication  
Back: Returns to the previous screen.  
Optional Service  
Remote Service  
Printing a report  
Admin Setting screen  
Gives you access to detailed machine settings.  
Note  
When you press Admin Setting, a login message appears. If  
the administrator set the password, you have to enter the  
password every time you want to use Admin Setting.  
(Page 3.3)  
Machine Setup  
1
2
Press Machine Setup on the control panel.  
Select the appropriate item for your occasion.  
General tab: Sets the basic parameters of the machine such as  
location, date, time, and more. (Page 9.2)  
Machine Status: Shows the current machine status.  
Setup tab: Sets the values for fax, network and login. Also you can  
Admin Setting: Allows administrator to set up the machine.  
set to enable the feature listed on the screen.  
When you press Admin Setting, login message pops up. Enter  
password and press OK. (Factory setting is 1111.)  
Print/Report tab: Prints configuration or font list and displays a  
report of machine features. (Page 9.7)  
Back: Returns to the previous screen.  
Browsing the machine’s status  
You can browse the machine information and validate some features of  
the machine.  
1
Press Machine Setup on the control panel.  
9.1  
<Machine status and advanced setup>  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                     
2
Press Machine Status > the Machine Info tab.  
3
Press the General tab.  
Option  
Description  
Option  
Description  
Machine Details  
This option shows the customer support  
information on the email address and the phone  
number you stored from Admin Setting. Also,  
you can check the machine's serial number, or  
the hardware and software information  
specification.  
Device Info  
The sub-options available are Service Center  
Registration and Contact Info. You may enter  
information on service center and purchasing  
point.  
Date & Time  
You can set the date and time. (Page 3.4)  
Default Settings  
Default Window: Set the first window that  
will appear on the display screen after turning  
on the machine or waking up from the Low  
Power Mode to Sleep Mode. For example, if  
you select Fax as a default window, the first  
window will be the Basic tab of the Fax  
feature. In case you want to show ID Copy as  
a default window, you need to enable this  
feature in Default Option previously.  
Print/Report  
Tray Status  
You can print various helpful and informative  
reports such as System Report, Fax Report  
and Scan Report. (Page 10.1)  
The screen shows the trays installed on your  
machine, and their current configurations.  
Supplies  
Information  
You can view the amount of each category that  
your machine has printed so far. To print this  
report, see page 9.7.  
Default Option: Changes all the default  
values for copying, faxing, emailing, scanning  
and paper at once. (Page 3.5)  
General settings  
Note: Depending on the optional kit you  
installed or the category you selected, the  
selectable options on the display screen may  
differ.  
Before you get ready to using the machine, it is recommended to set up  
the machine parameters.  
1
2
Press Machine Setup on the control panel.  
Measurements  
Timers  
This option lets you change the measurement  
unit to use (mm or inch), and set the numeric  
separation (comma or period).  
Press Admin Setting. When the login message pops up, then enter  
password and press OK. (Factory setting is 1111.)  
The machine cancels a printing job if data does  
not be received in specific time.  
System Timeout: The machine returns to the  
default value after certain time the machine  
waits. You can set a time for maximum 10  
minutes.  
Held Job Timeout: The machine holds a job  
for a specific time period. You can set a time  
period for at least an hour.  
Language  
It allows you to change the language that  
appears on the touch screen.  
9.2  
<Machine status and advanced setup>  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                 
Option  
Description  
Option  
Sound  
Description  
Energy Saver  
You can reduce energy consumption by setting  
these features. Energy Saver has three  
options, first Low Power Mode to Sleep Mode  
turns off the scanner lamp under the glass. And  
Power Save turns off all the fans within the  
machine after a certain time. Standby to Low  
Power Mode turns off the fans within the  
machine except a core fan for the fuser unit.  
(Page 3.4)  
You can adjust the loudness of the machine  
sound. Press Fault to adjust the machine's  
error sound. Select Conflict if you pressed the  
wrong option. Press Selection to sound  
whenever you press the selection from your  
touch screen.  
Supplies  
Management  
The machine gives you the notification of the  
drum and toner to reorder, and resets the used  
fuser counter, bias transfer roller, feed roller and  
document feeder friction pad counter.  
Tray  
This feature allows you to select the tray and  
paper you use for a printing job. Paper size,  
paper type, and paper color options are  
adjusted here. Tray Confirmation Message is  
to activate the window asking whether you set  
the paper size and type for the just opened tray.  
Management  
Machine Test  
The machine prints the test image patterns  
using Image Quality Test Patterns.  
On Demand  
Overwrite  
You can set the machine to delete previous job  
information on HDD as you store new job  
information. To activate this feature, go to  
Admin Setting > the Setup tab > Optional  
Service and set the On Demand Image  
Overwrite option to Enable. After activating  
this feature you can overwrite a HDD by  
pressing Start in the display.  
Auto Tray Switch: If tray1 and tray2 are filled  
with letter size paper, when tray1 is empty  
and this option is On, then the machine  
continues printing with paper in tray2.  
Auto Continue: When the paper is  
mismatched, meaning that tray1has filled with  
the letter size paper, but the printing job  
needs A4 size paper, the machine will wait for  
30 seconds to paper in tray1 with proper  
sized paper. After 30 seconds, the machine  
automatically starts printing with Letter sized  
paper.  
Copy Setup  
For copy output, you can set up several options in advance.  
1
2
Press Machine Setup on the control panel.  
Altitude  
Adjustment  
Print quality is affected by atmospheric  
pressure, which atmospheric pressure is  
determined by the height of the machine above  
sea level. This feature lets you adjust the  
altitude in a height district. Higher altitude  
location need to set this feature to High 3,  
which affects print quality.  
Press Admin Setting. When the login message pops up, enter  
password and press OK.  
3
Press the Setup tab > Copy Setup.  
Output Options  
Output Options is for, when the staples run  
out, you to let the machine stop processing and  
wait to refill the staples or continue the job. If  
you set Within Job Offsetting to On, the  
output paper is placed and sorted by printout-  
sets.  
Contention  
Management  
This feature lets you to select the priority  
between copy jobs and print jobs.  
Option  
Description  
Priority: Set the priority by numbering the  
job. The machine starts from the least to the  
highest number in order.  
First In, First Out: The machine does an  
asked job in order.  
Page Number  
If you select this option On, each copy will  
include the page number on the bottom of each  
page.  
Time & Date  
Set this option On in order to print the date and  
time on each copy, set from the General tab.  
9.3  
<Machine status and advanced setup>  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                     
Option  
ID Stamp  
Description  
Option  
Description  
This option is used to set words or a message  
to print on your copies. Set this option On and  
an input screen will be displayed, write your  
message using the pop up keyboard.  
Fax Initial Setup  
You can set Receive Mode for Telephone Fax  
or Answering Machine/Fax, and Dial Type at  
either DP (Dial Pulse) or MF (Multi Frequency).  
,
When you select Answering Machine/Fax,  
you can receive a fax while the line is being  
used by the answering machine. (Page 6.4)  
Contact your local telephone company for Dial  
Type setting information.  
Fax Setup  
This machine offers you with various options to you for setting up the fax  
system. You can change the default settings for your preferences and  
needs.  
Auto Answer  
Delay  
You can specify the number of times the  
machine rings before answering an incoming  
call.  
1
2
Press Machine Setup on the control panel.  
Receive Header  
Secure Receive  
Use this option to automatically print the page  
number, date and time of fax reception at the  
bottom of each page.  
Press Admin Setting. When the login message pops up, enter  
password and press OK.  
You may need to prevent your received faxes  
from being accessed by unauthorized people.  
This feature restricts printing of received faxes  
when the machine is unattended. If you select  
this option to On, all incoming faxes go into  
memory.  
3
Press the Setup tab > Fax Setup.  
A four-digit Passcode is used when you want to  
print out received faxes in memory. (Page 6.5)  
Received Fax  
Printing  
When receiving a fax containing pages longer  
than the paper loaded in the tray, the machine  
can reduce the size of the original to fit the size  
of the paper loaded in the machine. If this  
feature is set to Off, the machine cannot reduce  
the original to fit onto one page. The original will  
be divided and printed in actual size on two or  
more pages. If you set this option to On and set  
the discard size to 10mm and the received data  
is longer then the currently set paper in the tray,  
the machine minuses the data that would have  
been on the specified discard segment.  
Note  
The fax options are different from country to country  
depending on the international communication regulatory. If  
the display screen does not show or gray out some of the  
fax options explained herein, it means that the grayed out  
function does not supported in your communication  
environment.  
Option  
Description  
Terminal ID  
Enter the machine ID and fax number which will  
be printed at the top of each page.  
Redial  
The machine can automatically redial a remote  
fax machine, if it was busy. You can set the  
number of redial attempts and an interval  
between attempts. Selecting 0 for Redial  
Attempts means that the machine will not use  
this feature.  
Remote Code  
This feature works best when you are using an  
extension telephone connected to the EXT  
socket on the back of your machine. You can  
receive a fax from someone you are talking to  
on the extension telephone, without going to the  
fax machine. (Page 6.4)  
Speaker Volume  
(Audio Line  
Monitor)  
This controls the sound when a fax actually  
starts to transfer data. If this option is On, the  
machine sounds from a fax starts until a fax  
finishes. With Comm. the machine sounds only  
until the communication is succeeded. No  
sound with Off option.  
Error Correction  
Mode  
It helps with poor line quality and makes sure  
any faxes you send are properly transmitted to  
any other ECM-equipped fax machines.  
Sending a fax using ECM may take more time.  
9.4  
<Machine status and advanced setup>  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
Option  
Description  
Network Setup  
Prefix Dial  
This feature allows you to set a prefix of up to  
five digits. This number will be dialed before any  
automatic number is dialed. User may set this  
to access a PABX (example 9) or area code  
number (example 02).  
You may set up the network with the machine's touch screen. Before  
doing that, you must have the information concerning the type of network  
protocols and computer system you use. If you are not sure which setting  
to use, contact your network administrator to configure this machine  
network.  
a
Junk Fax  
Number List  
The machine does not accept faxes sent from  
remote stations if their numbers are stored in  
the memory as junk fax numbers. You can enter  
a maximum of 10 junk fax numbers. Press  
Junk Fax Number List and Edit and enter the  
last numbers (1~7 digit) of the fax number.  
For further explanation about network environment, refer to Network  
Printer User’s Guide within Network Utilities CD.  
1
2
Press Machine Setup on the control panel.  
Press Admin Setting. When the login message pops up, enter  
password and press OK.  
Ring Volume  
This feature adjusts the ring volume. When you  
select Off, the machine does not ring.  
3
Press the Setup tab > Network Setup.  
Dial Tone  
Volume  
When you press On Hook Dial to send a fax,  
you can hear a specific tone. To adjust the tone  
volume, you can use this feature. Value Low  
volume is the lowest.  
Output Option  
Mailbox Setup  
You can set the machine to print out the fax on  
both sides of the paper, or stapled. (Page 6.5)  
Document Policy: You can set the document  
stored in Mailbox to delete or retain  
documents after. Select On of each option to  
delete, Off to remain the data.  
Option  
Description  
TCP/IP Protocol  
Select appropriate protocol and configure  
parameters to use the network environment.  
Mail Configuration: You can create, edit, or  
delete Mailbox. Enter Mailbox ID, Mailbox  
Name, Mailbox Passcode by pressing  
options. (Page 6.9)  
Note: If you set the Notification option to On,  
you are notified when a fax is received in  
Mailbox. (Page 6.9)  
Note: There are lots of parameters to be set,  
therefore, if you are not sure, leave as it is, or  
consult the network administrator.  
NetWare Setting  
This machine is compatible with Novell  
NetWare networks. You can print to the network  
printer from any NetWare client.  
Output Tray  
Toll Save  
This feature lets you select the paper tray to  
use for receiving a fax.  
Apple Talk  
Protocol  
For Macintosh network environments, select  
this option. This option provides packet  
transmission and routing functionality for  
networking.  
Set the machine to send a fax in the toll save  
time for saving. (Page 6.10)  
Send Batch  
The machine asks you whether you want to add  
the documents to the reserved delay fax, if the  
fax number you have dialed is same as the  
delay fax number. (Page 6.10)  
Fax Forward  
Settings  
You can forward a sent or received fax to other  
destination by a fax or an email. (Page 6.11)  
a. Private Automatic Branch Exchange  
9.5  
<Machine status and advanced setup>  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Option  
Description  
Authentication  
Authentication Foreign Device Internal Credits: It is used  
This feature lets you control and lock all outgoing data, or change the  
password.  
Mode  
Interface  
when you cancel the job or  
when the job is cancelled by  
the device due to insufficient  
credits (coin) or is canceled by  
user’s request. If you select  
Enable, the machine deposits  
a credit equal to the number  
of sheets that did not print out  
correctly, then it prints next job  
for free (for the amount  
(Continue)  
(Continue)  
1
2
Press Machine Setup on the control panel.  
Press Admin Setting. When the login message pops up, then enter  
password and press OK.  
3
Press the Setup tab > Authentication.  
deposited). With Disable,  
even if you cancel the printing  
job, the machine includes  
jammed paper in the count  
and the cost of printing.  
Image Counter: Depends on  
whether the machine counts  
blank white pages.  
Option  
Description  
No  
It disables Authentication  
Authentication Network  
It enables the authentication  
mode which can be used for  
Job Accounting Plug-in the  
SyncThru™ Web Admin  
Service.  
Authentication Mode.  
Mode  
Mode  
Accounting  
Change Admin. Password  
You can change the password  
for the Admin Setting  
authentication.  
Foreign Device When you install the optional  
Interface  
FDI kit, select On to activate it.  
Job Timer: If there is not  
enough credit, you can set the  
machine to cancel a job right  
away or wait a designated  
amount of time for a deposit.  
Print Job Control: When it is  
enabled, the both computer  
printing and copying are  
Optional Service  
When you want to add the optional features for this machine, you have to  
install the optional kit and then set the machine to enable and activate  
those features. Follow the next steps to enable those features.  
1
2
Press Machine Setup on the control panel.  
Press Admin Setting. When the login message pops up, then enter  
password and press OK.  
possible since the credit  
remains. With Disable, only  
the copy printing job needs  
the credit. (which means a  
computer printing a report or a  
fax job needs no credits)  
Inhibit Services: When no  
credit is left, the machine  
disables the copy job only with  
Copy Only. With All Service,  
scanning service and copy job  
are disabled.  
3
Press the Setup tab > Optional Service.  
Option  
N/W Scan  
Description  
If you are not using the network scan feature,  
select Disable, then the Scan icon on the  
display will be grayed out.  
9.6  
<Machine status and advanced setup>  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
Option  
Description  
Printing a report  
Analog Fax  
After installing the fax kit, select this option  
Enable to use this machine as a fax machine.  
You can print a report on the machine's configuration or font list, etcetera.  
1
2
Press Machine Setup on the control panel.  
On Demand  
Image Overwrite  
You can set the machine to delete previous job  
information on HDD as you store new job  
information. Set this option to Enable, go to the  
General tab > On Demand Overwrite, press  
Start in the display to start the overwriting job.  
Press Admin Setting. When the login message pops up, then enter  
password and press OK.  
3
Press the Print/Report tab.  
ImmediateImage If you select Enable, the machine renews the  
Overwrite  
HDD memory when you save new job on it.  
Remote Service  
This option enables the machine send the notification to service  
representatives to inform them that the machine needs supplies such as  
a toner cartridge.  
Option  
Description  
1
2
Press Machine Setup on the control panel.  
Print  
You can print Network  
Press Admin Setting. When the login message pops up, then enter  
password and press OK.  
Configuration, PS3 Font List,  
PCL Font List and Schedule  
Jobs Report. Schedule Jobs  
Report shows the job list in  
pending, in delayed faxing or the  
Mailbox list as well.  
3
Press the Setup tab > Remote Service.  
Accounting Supplies  
You can print the amount of each  
category that your machine has  
printed so far.  
Report  
Information  
Network Auth.  
Log Report  
It displays user login IDs and  
emails.  
Usage Page  
Report  
You can print the report on the  
amount of printouts depending on  
the paper size and type.  
Option  
Description  
Remote Service  
Criteria Value  
Select On to use Remote Service.  
Accounting  
Report  
Prints the report of printing out  
count for each login user.  
Sets the machine to count printed pages or the  
number of days the machine will be used. After  
setting up dates or number of pages, the  
machine will send a fax to the service  
representatives informing the machine has  
used over set date, or did print job more than  
set pages.  
Service Number  
Enter the fax numbers for the service  
representatives.  
9.7  
<Machine status and advanced setup>  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                           
Option  
Configuration  
Description  
Option  
E-mail  
Description  
Report  
You can print a report on the  
machine's overall configuration.  
Report  
The report shows the job of  
scanning and sending it via Scan  
to Email.  
Report  
Confirmation  
Report  
(Continue)  
Fax Report  
You can set to print the information  
of a fax reports.  
On: The report is printed  
whether a job successfully  
completed or failed.  
Off: No report is printed after  
completing a job.  
On-Error: Only in case of error  
occurrence, the machine prints  
the report.  
Multi Send Report: When you  
fax to several destination, set  
this option to print a  
transmission report. On is to  
print every time you send a fax,  
the machine prints a  
confirmation report. With On-  
Error, only when the  
Scan to Server  
Confirmation  
The report shows the job of  
scanning and sending it via SMB  
and FTP.  
transmission error occurred, the  
report will be printed out.  
Fax Send Report Appearance:  
You can select whether the  
image on the confirmation report  
shows or not.  
Fax Send Report: The machine  
prints the confirmation report  
after each fax job, only when  
you send a fax to one  
On: The report is printed  
whether a job successfully  
completed or failed.  
Off: No report is printed after  
completing a job.  
On-Error: Only in case of error  
occurrence, the machine prints  
the report.  
destination.  
Fax Sent/Received Report:  
The machine stores the logs on  
each transmission and prints out  
every 50 logs with this option  
On. It you select Off, the  
machine stores the logs but  
does not print.  
Note  
You can also print machine's status information and browse  
status with SyncThru Web Service. Open the web browser  
on your networked computer and type the IP address of  
your machine. When SyncThru Web Service opens, click  
Information > Print information.  
9.8  
<Machine status and advanced setup>  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Monitoring the supplies life  
10Maintenance  
If you want to view the supply life indicators, follow the next step.  
This chapter provides information for maintaining your machine and the  
toner cartridge.  
1
2
3
Press Machine Setup on the control panel.  
Press Machine Status  
This chapter includes:  
.
Printing a machine report  
Scroll down to browse the entire supplies list view the percentage  
remaining.  
Monitoring the supplies life  
Finding the serial number  
Sending the toner reorder notification  
Sending the drum reorder notification  
Checking Stored Documents  
Cleaning your machine  
Finding the serial number  
If you want to check your serial number from the screen, follow the next  
steps.  
Maintaining the cartridge  
1
2
Press Machine Setup on the control panel.  
Maintenance Parts  
Press Machine Status > the Machine Info tab > Machine Details  
.
Managing your machine from the website  
Sending the toner reorder notification  
Printing a machine report  
You can set the machine to alert you that the toner level is low and needs  
to be reordered.  
You can print the machine's information and job report.  
1
2
3
Press Machine Setup on the control panel.  
1
2
Press Machine Setup on the control panel.  
Press Machine Status > the Machine Info tab > Print/Report  
.
Press Admin Setting. When the login message pops up, then enter  
password and press OK  
.
Select the report type, then the right side of the screen shows the  
list to print.  
3
Press the General tab > Supplies Management > Toner Cartridge  
Reorder Notification.  
4
Select the list to print.  
4
5
Press Toner Reorder at Life Remaining and select a percentage.  
Press OK  
.
Sending the drum reorder notification  
You can set the machine to alert you that the drum level is low and needs  
to be reordered.  
5
Press Print.  
1
2
Press Machine Setup on the control panel.  
Note  
Press Admin Setting. When the login message pops up, then enter  
• If you want to print the machine's network information or font  
list, press Machine Setup > Admin Setting > the Print/Report  
tab. In case you select the Configuration Report, just press  
Print Now to print the report. The Fax Report, E-mail  
Confirmation Report, and Scan to Server Confirmation  
options do not provide the print, these are only for report setup.  
• You can use SyncThru Web Service to print the machine's  
configuration or browse the status. Open the web browser in  
the networked computer, and type the machine's IP address.  
When SyncThru Web Service is opened, click Information >  
Print information.  
password and press OK  
.
3
Press the General tab > Supplies Management > Drum Cartridge  
Reorder Notification.  
4
5
Press Drum Reorder at Life Remaining and select a percentage.  
Press OK  
.
10.1  
<
Maintenance>  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                           
Cleaning the transfer unit  
Checking Stored Documents  
The cleaning the transfer unit within this machine is recommended for its  
printing quality. The cleaning period is best once a year or once 10,000  
pages printing.  
The machine shows the document list of the print or fax job.  
Press Stored Documents on the Main screen. If the screen displays an  
other menu, press (  
) to go to the Main screen.  
1
2
3
4
Prepare a soft lint-free cloth.  
Turn off the machine.  
Unplug the power cable.  
Open the side cover.  
Public tab: Shows the job list of delay print and store print job.  
Secured tab: Shows the job list of secure print, secure receive,  
and secure store print job.  
User Name: Shows the user name who registered the job.  
File Name: Shows the job name which is registered as the job  
information. For the computer printing, the file name shows.  
Date: Shows the date of the job registered.  
Page: Shows the total page number of the job.  
Detail: Pops the separate message showing the basic job  
information with the file size, the paper size and the paper type, as  
well.  
5
Wipe the surface of the transfer unit.  
Edit: Lets you to modify the file name.  
Delete: Deletes the selected list.  
Print: Prints the selected list.  
Cleaning your machine  
To maintain print and scan quality, follow the cleaning procedures below  
each time the toner cartridge is replaced or if print and scan quality  
problems occur.  
Caution  
Cleaning the machine cabinet with cleaning materials that  
contain large amounts of alcohol, solvent, or other strong  
substances can discolor or damage the cabinet.  
6
7
Close the side cover.  
Plug the power cable and turn the machine on.  
Cleaning the outside  
Clean the machine cabinet with a soft lint-free cloth. You can dampen the  
cloth slightly with water, but be careful not to let any water drip onto or into  
the machine.  
Cleaning the scan unit  
Keeping the scan unit clean helps ensure the best possible copies. We  
suggest that you clean the scan unit at the start of each day and during  
the day, as needed.  
Cleaning the inside  
1
2
Slightly dampen a soft lint-free cloth or paper towel with water.  
Open the scanner lid.  
Contact a service representative to clean the inside of the machine.  
10.2  
<
Maintenance>  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                         
3
Wipe the surface of the scanner glass and DADF glass until it is  
clean and dry.  
Replacing the toner cartridge  
When the toner cartridge is completely empty:  
Toner Empty, Replace Toner1 appears on the display.  
• The machine stops printing. Incoming faxes are saved in memory.  
1
At this stage, the toner cartridge needs to be replaced.Check the type of  
the toner cartridge for your machine. (Page 12.1)  
3
1
Open the side cover.  
2
4
white sheet  
DADF glass  
scanner lid  
1
2
3
4
scanner glass  
2
Open the front cover.  
4
5
Wipe the underside of the scanner lid and white sheet until it is  
clean and dry.  
Close the scanner lid.  
Maintaining the cartridge  
The cartridge storage  
To get the most from the toner cartridge, keep the following guidelines in  
mind:  
• Do not remove the toner cartridge from its package until ready for use.  
• Do not refill the toner cartridge. The machine warranty does not cover  
damage caused by using a refilled cartridge.  
• Store toner cartridges in the same environment as your machine.  
To prevent damage to the toner cartridge, do not expose it to light for  
more than a few minutes.  
Expected cartridge life  
The toner cartridge yield depends on the amount of toner that print jobs  
require. Average yield for a new toner cartridge is 20,000 standard pages  
in accordance with the ISO/IEC 19752 standard. (Average yield for the  
original toner cartridge supplied with the machine is 20,000 standard  
pages.) The actual number may also be different depending on the print  
density of the pages you print on, and the number of pages may be  
affected by operating environment, printing interval, media type, and  
media size. If you print a lot of graphics, you may need to change the  
cartridge more often.  
10.3  
<
Maintenance>  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
3
Turn the cartridge locking lever toward the right until you hear a  
'click', to release the toner cartridge.  
7
Hold the toner cartridge by the handle and slowly insert the cartridge  
into the opening in the machine.  
4
Lift the locking lever and pull the toner cartridge out.  
8
9
Slide the new toner cartridge in until it locks in place.  
Turn the cartridge locking lever toward the left until you hear a 'click'.  
5
6
Remove the new toner cartridge from its bag.  
10 Close the front cover, then the side cover.  
Thoroughly roll the cartridge five or six times to distribute the toner  
evenly inside the cartridge.  
Replacing the drum cartridge  
Expected cartridge life  
The useful life of the drum cartridge is approximately 60,000 pages. The  
screen displays Drum Warning when the drum is near the end of life.  
Approximately 6,000 more pages can be made after the drum warning  
message, but you should have a replacement drum cartridge in stock.  
Drum cartridge yield may be affected by the operating environment,  
optional, printing interval, media type and media size.  
Note  
If toner gets on your clothing, wipe it off with a dry cloth and  
wash clothing in cold water. Hot water sets toner into fabric.  
Replace Drum appears on the display.  
For ordering information for drum cartridges. (Page 12.1)  
10.4  
<
Maintenance>  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
1
2
3
Open the side cover.  
4
Lift the locking lever and pull the toner cartridge out.  
Open the front cover.  
Note  
The toner cartridge must be removed to replace the drum  
cartridge.  
5
Pull the used drum cartridge out.  
Turn the cartridge locking lever toward the right until you hear a  
'click', to release the toner cartridge.  
6
7
8
Remove the new drum cartridge from its bag.  
Open the carefully pull the seal tape out of the cartridge.  
Thoroughly shake the drum cartridge side to side five or six times.  
Note  
If toner gets on your clothing, wipe it off with a dry cloth and  
wash clothing in cold water. Hot water sets toner into fabric.  
10.5  
<
Maintenance>  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Caution  
Items  
Yield (Average)  
Approx. 200,000 pages  
Approx. 200,000 pages  
Do not touch the green part, midside of the drum cartridge.  
Use the handle on the cartridge to avoid touching this area.  
DADF feed roller  
9
Unpack the new drum cartridge and slide it into place, making sure  
not to touch the surface of the drum.  
Multi-purpose tray feed  
roller  
Transfer roller  
Fuser unit  
Approx. 100,000 pages  
Approx. 200,000 pages  
Approx. 200,000 pages  
Paper Feed roller  
We highly recommend that this maintenance be performed by an  
authorized service provider, dealer or the retailer where you bought the  
machine. The warranty does not cover the replacement of the  
maintenance parts after their lifespan.  
Managing your machine from the website  
If you have connected your machine to a network and set up TCP/IP  
network parameters correctly, you can manage the machine via  
Samsung’s SyncThru Web Service, an embedded web server. Use  
SyncThru Web Service to:  
10 Slide the toner cartridge in until it locks in place.  
11 Turn the cartridge locking lever toward the left until you hear a 'click'.  
• View the device information and check its current status.  
• Change TCP/IP parameters and set up other network parameters.  
• Change the printer properties.  
• Set the machine to send email notifications and update you on the  
machine’s status.  
• Get support for using the machine.  
To access SyncThru Web Service:  
1
2
Start a web browser, such as Internet Explorer, from Windows.  
Enter the machine IP address (http://xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx) in the address  
field and press the Enter key or click Go  
.
Your machine’s embedded website opens.  
12 Close the front cover, then the side cover.  
Maintenance Parts  
To avoid print quality and paper feed problems resulting from worn parts  
and to maintain your machine in top working condition the following items  
will need to be replaced after the specified number of pages or when the  
life span of each item has expired.  
Items  
Yield (Average)  
Approx. 50,000 pages  
Approx. 50,000 pages  
DADF rubber pad  
Multi-purpose tray rubber  
pad  
10.6  
<
Maintenance>  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
3
Gently remove the jammed paper from the DADF.  
11 Troubleshooting  
This chapter gives helpful information on what to do if you encounter a  
problem.  
This chapter includes:  
Clearing document jams  
Clearing paper jams  
Understanding display messages  
Solving other problems  
Clearing document jams  
When an original jams while passing through the DADF, the warming  
message appears on the display screen.  
Caution  
Note  
To avoid tearing the document, remove the jammed document  
gently and slowly.  
If you see no paper in this area, refer to Roller misfeed.  
(Page 11.2)  
Note  
4
Close the DADF cover. Then reload the pages you removed, if any,  
in the DADF.  
To prevent document jams, use the scanner glass for thick, thin,  
or mixed paper-type originals.  
Misfeed of exiting paper  
1
2
Remove any remaining pages from the DADF.  
Open the DADF cover.  
1
2
Remove the remaining documents from the DADF.  
Open the document input tray upwards and pull the document  
gently out of the DADF.  
3
Close the document input tray. Then place the documents back in  
the DADF.  
11.1  
<
Troubleshooting>  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
Roller misfeed  
Message  
Location of jam  
In the duplex unit  
Go to  
1
2
Open the scanner lid.  
Duplex Jam 0,  
Duplex Jam 1,  
Duplex Jam 2  
Page 11.6  
Grasp the misfed paper, and remove the paper from the feed area  
by carefully pulling it to the right using both hands.  
Finisher Jam 0  
In the stacker unit  
In the stacker unit  
Page 11.7  
Page 11.7  
Finisher Jam 1,  
Finisher Duplex  
Jam  
Finisher Jam 2  
In the stacker unit  
Page 11.8  
1
Caution  
To avoid tearing the paper, pull the jammed paper out gently  
and slowly. Follow the instructions in the following sections to  
clear the jam.  
In the tray 1  
1
Pull out the paper tray to open. After you pull it out completely, lift  
the front part of the tray up slightly to release the tray from the  
machine.  
scanner lid  
1
3
Close the scanner lid. Then load the removed pages back into the  
DADF.  
Clearing paper jams  
When a paper jam occurs, the warming message appears on the display  
screen. Refer to the table below to locate and clear the paper jam.  
Message  
Location of jam  
Go to  
Feed Jam at Tray 1, In the paper feed area (tray 1, below and  
optional tray, or multi-purpose page 11.5  
tray)  
Feed Jam at Tray 2,  
Feed Jam at Tray 3,  
Feed Jam at Tray 4,  
Feed Jam at MP  
Tray  
Check Tray 2 Feed  
Area,  
In the paper feed area  
(optional tray)  
Page 11.3  
Check Tray 3 Feed  
Area,  
Check Tray 4 Feed  
Area  
Jam at Fuser  
In the fuser area or around  
the toner cartridge  
Page 11.5  
Page 11.6  
Registration Jam  
In the paper exit area  
11.2  
<
Troubleshooting>  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
2
Remove the jammed paper by gently pulling it straight out.  
5
Close the side cover and insert the paper tray. Lower the rear part of  
the Tray to align the rear edge with the corresponding slot of the  
machine, then insert it completely.  
Once you remove the jammed paper here, open the side cover and  
then close it to clear the error message on the display.  
If there is any resistance, and the paper does not move immediately when  
you pull, stop pulling. Then:  
3
Open the side cover.  
In the optional tray  
Note  
This part explains the method of removing the jammed paper in  
the optional tray 2. Please refer to the next method for other  
optional trays, since the method is same as the tray 2  
1
2
Pull out the optional tray 2.  
Lift the front part of the tray slightly up to release the tray from the  
machine.  
Note  
Do not touch the shiny drum cartridge surface. Scratches or  
smudges will result in poor print quality.  
4
Carefully remove the misfed paper in the direction shown.  
If the paper does not move when you pull, or if you do not see the  
paper in this area, stop and go to step 3.  
11.3  
<
Troubleshooting>  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
3
Remove the paper in the direction shown. To avoid tearing the  
paper, pull it out gently and slowly.  
6
Pull the jammed paper out in the direction shown. To avoid tearing  
the paper, pull it out gently and slowly.  
If you cannot find the jammed paper, or if there is any resistance  
when removing the paper, stop pulling and continue on step 5.  
7
Close the two covers.  
4
Open the outer cover in tray 2.  
5
Open the inner cover of tray 2.  
11.4  
<
Troubleshooting>  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
In the multi-purpose tray  
In the fuser area or around the toner cartridge  
1
If the paper is not feeding properly, pull the paper out of the  
machine.  
Note  
The fuser area is hot. Take care when removing paper from the  
machine.  
1
Open the side cover.  
2
Open and close the side cover. Printing automatically resumes.  
2
Remove the jammed paper, in the direction shown.  
3
Close the side cover.  
11.5  
<
Troubleshooting>  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
In the paper exit area  
In the duplex unit area  
If the duplex unit is not inserted correctly, paper jam may occur. Make  
sure that the duplex unit is inserted correctly.  
1
2
Open the side cover.  
Gently pull the paper out through the exit area.  
1
2
Open the side cover.  
Release the guide to pull the jammed paper easily.  
3
Close the side cover. Printing automatically resumes.  
3
Remove the jammed paper.  
4
Close the side cover.  
11.6  
<
Troubleshooting>  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Finisher Jam 1, Finisher Duplex Jam  
In the stacker (finisher)  
1
Open the stacker front cover.  
Finisher Jam 0  
1
Open the stacker front cover.  
2
Pull the stacker lever 1a down. If necessary, pull the stacker lever  
1b down as well.  
2
Pull out the stacker lifting the stacker lever 1c up.  
3
Remove the jammed paper.  
3
4
5
Remove the jammed paper.  
Slide in the stacker until you hear the sound ‘click’.  
Close the stacker front cover.  
11.7  
<
Troubleshooting>  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
4
Pull up on the stacker lever and then close the stacker front cover.  
Load the paper into the tray with the long edge facing the front of the  
tray. If load the paper this way, printing both sides of the paper (Duplex)  
is not supported.  
In the printer properties window, set the page orientation to be rotated  
90 degrees. See the Software section.  
Finisher Jam 2  
Gently pull the paper out through the exit area.  
Understanding display messages  
1
Messages appear on the Smart Panel program window or on the control  
panel display to indicate machine status or errors. Refer to the tables  
below to understand the messages meaning to correct the problem, if  
necessary. Messages and their explanations are listed in alphabetical  
order.  
Note  
When you call for service, it is very convenient to provide the  
service representative with the contents of display message.  
Message  
Ambient  
Temperature  
Sensor Fault  
Meaning  
Suggested solutions  
The sensor for the  
inner temperature of  
the machine is not  
working properly.  
Turn the machine off  
and turn it on again. If  
the problem persists,  
please call for  
service.  
Tips for avoiding paper jams  
BOOTP server  
error. An Auto IP  
address has been  
established.  
BOOTP server does  
not work. The  
machine is working  
with auto IP setting  
function.  
Set the network  
parameters again or  
assign a new static IP  
address.  
By selecting the correct media types, most paper jams can be avoided.  
When a paper jam occurs, follow the steps outlined on page 11.2.  
• Follow the procedures on page 4.5. Ensure that the adjustable guides  
are positioned correctly.  
BOOTP server  
error. An Auto IP  
is not working  
The BOOTP server  
does not work, and  
the auto IP setting is  
failed.  
Set the network  
parameters again or  
assign a new static IP  
address.  
• Do not overload the tray. Ensure that the paper level is below the  
paper capacity mark on the inside of the tray.  
• Do not remove paper from the tray while your machine is printing.  
• Flex, fan, and straighten paper before loading.  
• Do not use creased, damp, or highly curled paper.  
• Do not mix paper types in a tray.  
CCD Lock  
The CCD (Charged  
Couple Device) lock  
has been locked.  
The CCD does not  
detect its home  
Unlock the CCD lock.  
(Page 1.2) Or turn off  
the machine and on  
again. Try again. If  
the problem persists,  
call for service.  
• Use only recommended print media. (Page 4.8  
)
• Ensure that the recommended side of the print media is facing down in  
the tray, or facing down in the multi-purpose tray.  
location or move.  
• If paper jams occur frequently when you print on A5/B5-sized paper:  
11.8  
<
Troubleshooting>  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
Message  
Meaning  
Suggested solutions  
Message  
Meaning  
Suggested solutions  
Check Fax Kit  
The fax kit is not  
installed, or the fax  
is not working  
properly.  
Reinstall the fax kit. If  
the problem persists,  
please call for  
DHCP server error. DHCP server does  
Set the network  
setting again or  
assign a new static IP  
An Auto IP  
not work. The  
address has been  
established.  
machine is working  
with the setting IP by address.  
auto IP setting  
service.  
Check Hard Drive  
The hard disk drive  
does not work  
properly.  
Turn the machine off  
and turn it on again. If  
the problem persists,  
please call for  
function.  
DHCP server error. The DHCP server  
Set the network  
setting again or input  
An Auto IP is not  
working.  
does not work, and  
the auto IP setting is the new static IP  
service.  
failed.  
address.  
Check Tray 2 Feed Paper has jammed  
Clear the jam.  
Area  
in the tray feed area. (Page 11.3)  
Or the tray cover is  
opened.  
Drum Cartridge  
Initializing  
It is the mixing time  
when installing the  
new drum cartridge  
up to 180 sec.  
Wait about 180  
seconds until the  
machine is ready.  
Check Tray 3 Feed  
Area  
Check Tray 4 Feed  
Area  
Drum  
Communication  
Error  
Communication  
between the drum  
cartridge and the  
machine has failed.  
The drum cartridge  
is invalid.  
Reinstall the drum  
cartridge. If the  
problem persists,  
replace it.  
DADF Duplex  
Feeding Jam  
The lead edge of the Lift up the document  
document failed to  
actuate the scan  
sensor within the  
correct time after  
actuating the duplex  
sensor.  
input tray and remove  
the jammed original.  
(Page 11.1)  
Drum Warning  
Duplex Jam 0  
Duplex Jam 1  
Duplex Jam 2  
Ejector Fault  
The drum cartridge  
is near the end of its cartridge in stock.  
life.  
Ensure a replacement  
DADF Duplex Jam The lead edge of the Lift up the document  
Paper has jammed  
during duplex  
printing.  
Clear the jam.  
(Page 11.6)  
document failed to  
actuate the duplex  
sensor within the  
correct time when  
the document was  
fed the wrong way.  
input tray and remove  
the jammed original.  
(Page 11.1)  
Paper has jammed  
during duplex  
printing.  
Clear the jam.  
(Page 11.6)  
DADF Exit Jam  
The lead edge of the Open the DADF cover  
Paper has jammed  
during duplex  
printing.  
Clear the jam.  
(Page 11.6)  
document failed to  
actuate the gate  
sensor within the  
correct time after  
actuating the scan  
sensor.  
and remove the  
jammed original.  
(Page 11.1)  
Ejector unit is not  
operating.  
Remove paper from  
the output tray  
(finisher). If this error  
message shows on  
the screen again,  
cycle power. If the  
problem persists, call  
for service.  
DADF Oversize  
Document  
Detected  
Oversizeddocument Open the DADF cover  
or double-feeding of and remove the  
originals.  
jammed original.  
(Page 11.1)  
Check the document  
size whether it is  
supported.  
Fax Memory is full. There is no more  
available fax  
Delete the received  
fax data in the  
memory. Call for  
service to delete fax  
memory.  
memory. No more  
fax data can be  
received.  
(Page 14.1)  
DADFRegistration The originals are  
Jam jammed in DADF.  
Open the DADF cover  
and remove the  
jammed original.  
(Page 11.1)  
11.9  
<
Troubleshooting>  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Message  
Meaning  
Suggested solutions  
Message  
Meaning  
Suggested solutions  
Fax Memory is  
low.  
Available fax  
memory is now  
1MB.  
Delete the received  
fax data in the  
memory to secure  
memory. Call for  
service.  
GUI to MCB  
Communications  
Fault  
A communication  
error has occurred.  
Turn the machine off  
and turn it on again. If  
the problem persists,  
please call for  
service.  
Feed Jam at MP  
Tray  
Paper Misfed from  
multi-purpose tray  
Clear the jam.  
(Page 11.5)  
Install Developer-  
Drum Cartridge  
The drum cartridge  
is not installed, or  
the CRUM  
Install the drum  
cartridge. If it is  
already installed, try  
to reinstall the drum  
cartridge.  
Feed Jam at Tray 1 Paper misfed from  
Clear the jam.  
(Page 11.2 and  
page 11.3)  
(Consumer  
tray  
Replaceable Unit  
Monitor) in the  
cartridge is not  
connected.  
Feed Jam at Tray 2  
If the problem  
persists, please call  
for service.  
Feed Jam at Tray 3  
Feed Jam at Tray 4  
Install Staple  
Cartridge  
The staple cartridge Install the staple  
is not installed.  
Finisher Duplex  
Jam  
Paper jammed in the Open the stacker  
stacker.  
cartridge following the  
steps explained on  
the back of the  
door and remove  
jammed paper by  
lowering guide 1a or  
1b.  
finisher door.  
(Page 13.2) If you  
want to continue the  
print job and  
disregard of this error  
message, go to  
Admin Setting to  
adjust the option.  
(Page 9.2)  
Finisher Interface  
Error  
Communication  
error has occurred  
between the stacker the problem persists,  
and the machine. call for service.  
Turn the machine off  
and turn it on again. If  
Finisher Jam 0  
Finisher Jam 1  
Paper jammed in the Open the stacker  
stacker.  
door and remove  
jammed paper by  
lowering guide 1a or  
1b.  
Install Toner  
Cartridge  
The toner cartridge  
is not installed or the toner cartridge.  
CRUM (Consumer  
Try to reinstall the  
Replaceable Unit  
Monitor) in the  
cartridge is not  
Finisher Jam 2  
Paper jammed in the Pull jammed paper  
stacker exit part. from the stacker exit.  
properly connected.  
Finisher Stacker  
Full  
The stacker is full of Remove printouts  
printouts.  
from the stacker.  
Invalid Drum  
cartridge  
The drum cartridge  
you have installed is genuine drum  
not for your  
machine.  
Install a Samsung-  
Front Jogger Fault Front Jogger is not  
Open the finisher  
door and clear any  
jammed paper (if  
there is). If this error  
message shows on  
the screen again,  
cycle power. If the  
problem persists, call  
for service.  
cartridge, designed  
for your machine.  
operating.  
Invalid Toner  
Cartridge  
The toner cartridge  
you have installed is genuine toner  
not for your  
machine.  
Install a Samsung-  
cartridge, designed  
for your machine.  
IP address conflict The IP address is  
used in other place  
Check the IP address  
or obtain a new IP  
address.  
Fuser error  
There is a problem  
in the fuser unit.  
Unplug the power  
cord and plug it back  
in. If the problem still  
persists, please call  
for service.  
elsewhere.  
Fuser High Error  
Fuser Low Error  
Fuser unit error  
Jam at Fuser  
Paper has jammed  
in the fuser area.  
Clear the jam.  
(Page 11.5)  
11.10  
<
Troubleshooting>  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Message  
Jam in Tray 2  
Jam in Tray 3  
Jam in Tray 4  
LSU Hsync Error  
LSU Motor Error  
Meaning  
Suggested solutions  
Message  
Meaning  
Suggested solutions  
Paper has jammed  
in the feeding area  
of the tray.  
Clear the jam.  
(Page 11.2 and  
page 11.3)  
Non Genuine  
Drum, Replace  
Drum  
The drum cartridge  
installed is not a  
genuine cartridge.  
This message  
appears when you  
selected Continue  
at Non Genuine  
Drum, Replace  
Drum prompt.  
Install the Samsung-  
genuine drum  
cartridge.  
A problem has  
occurred in the LSU cord and plug it back  
(Laser Scanning  
Unit).  
Unplug the power  
inches. If the problem  
persists, please call  
for service.  
Non Genuine  
Drum, Replace  
Drum1  
The drum cartridge  
installed is not a  
genuine cartridge.  
This message  
appears when you  
selected Stop at  
Non Genuine  
Install the Samsung-  
genuine drum  
cartridge.  
Main motor failure There is a problem  
Unplug the power  
cord and plug it back  
in. If the problem still  
persists, please call  
for service.  
in the motor unit.  
Drum, Replace  
Drum1 prompt.  
MCB to DADF  
Communications  
Fault  
The communication  
error has occurred.  
Turn the machine off  
and turn it on again. If  
the problem persists,  
please call for  
Non Genuine  
Toner, Replace  
Toner  
The toner cartridge  
installed is not a  
genuine cartridge.  
This message  
Install the Samsung-  
genuine toner  
cartridge.  
MCB to NIC  
Communications  
Fault  
service.  
appears when you  
selected Continue  
at Non Genuine  
Toner, Replace  
Toner prompt.  
MCB to Tray 2  
Communications  
Fault  
MCB to Tray 3  
Communications  
Fault  
Non Genuine  
Toner, Replace  
Toner1  
The toner cartridge  
installed is not a  
genuine cartridge.  
This message  
appears when you  
selected Stop at  
Non Genuine  
Install the Samsung-  
genuine toner  
cartridge.  
MCB to Tray 4  
Communications  
Fault  
MCB Watchdog  
Detects Software  
Failure  
MCB software is not Turn the machine off  
Toner, Replace  
Toner1 prompt.  
responding.  
and turn it on again. If  
the problem persists,  
please call for  
Output Bin full  
Paddle Fault  
The printed papers  
are full on the output from the output tray.  
tray.  
Remove printed outs  
service.  
Memory Failure  
Memory access  
failed.  
Turn the machine off  
and turn it on again. If  
the problem persists,  
please call for  
Paddle unit is not  
operating.  
Open the finisher  
door and clear any  
jammed paper (if  
there is). If this error  
message shows on  
the screen again,  
cycle power. If the  
problem persists, call  
for service.  
service.  
Network cable is  
disconnected  
The network cable is Connect the network  
disconnected.  
cable properly.  
Network card is  
not installed  
The network card  
does not work  
properly.  
Turn the machine off  
and turn it on again. If  
the problem persists,  
please call for  
service.  
11.11  
<
Troubleshooting>  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Message  
Meaning  
Suggested solutions  
Message  
Meaning  
Suggested solutions  
Paper Sensed in  
DADF.  
When the machine  
is on, jammed paper and remove the  
Open the DADF cover  
SMPS Fan failure  
There is a problem  
with the SMPS  
Unplug the power  
cord and plug it back  
is detected in the  
DADF.  
jammed original.  
(Page 11.1)  
(Switch Mode Power in. If the problem still  
Supply) Fan.  
persists, please call  
for service.  
Rear Jogger Fault Rear Jogger is not  
Open the finisher  
door and clear any  
jammed paper (if  
there is). If this error  
message shows on  
the screen again,  
cycle power. If the  
problem persists, call  
for service.  
operating.  
Stacker Fault  
Stacker unit is not  
operating.  
Remove paper from  
the output tray  
(finisher). If this error  
message shows on  
the screen again,  
cycle power. If the  
problem persists, call  
for service.  
Registration Jam  
Replace Drum  
Paper has jammed  
in the registration  
area.  
Clear the jam.  
(Page 11.6)  
Stapler Empty  
Stapler Fault  
Stapler is run out.  
Order Staple  
Cartridge.  
(Page 12.2) And  
replace it. (Page 13.2)  
The drum cartridge  
is at the end of its  
life. When the drum  
replacement  
message appears  
on the screen and if  
you select  
Replace a drum  
cartridge with a  
Samsung-genuine  
drum cartridge.  
(Page 10.4)  
Stapler is not  
operating.  
Remove paper from  
the output tray  
(finisher) and open  
the finisher door to  
clear the jammed  
paper. If this error  
message shows on  
the screen again,  
cycle power. If the  
problem persists, call  
for service.  
Continue, this  
message displays.  
Replace Drum1  
The drum cartridge  
is at the end of its  
life. When the drum  
replacement  
message appears  
on the screen and if  
you select Stop, this  
message displays.  
Replace a drum  
cartridge with a  
Samsung-genuine  
drum cartridge.  
(Page 10.4)  
Support Finger  
Fault  
Support Finger unit  
is not operating.  
Remove paper from  
the output tray  
(finisher). If this error  
message shows on  
the screen again,  
cycle power. If the  
problem persists, call  
for service.  
Replace toner  
Soemtimes the  
Replace the toner  
cartridge with a  
Samsung-genuine  
toner cartridge.  
(Page 10.3)  
machine connot  
recognize refilled or  
reinstalled toner.  
When users face  
this case, they have  
to buy and change  
toner cartridge.  
Toner Cartridge  
Communication  
Error  
Communication  
Reinstall the toner  
cartridge. If the  
problem persists,  
replace it.  
between the toner  
cartridge and the  
machine has failed.  
Toner Empty,  
Replace Toner1  
The toner in the  
cartridge has run  
out. The machine  
stops print job.  
Replace the toner  
cartridge with a  
Samsung-genuine  
toner cartridge.  
(Page 10.3)  
Scan Feeding Jam The lead edge of the Open the DADF cover  
document failed to  
actuate the scan  
sensor within the  
correct time after  
actuating the  
and remove jammed  
original. (Page 11.1)  
Toner Low  
The toner cartridge  
is almost empty.  
Ensure a replacement  
cartridge is in stock.  
registration sensor.  
11.12  
<
Troubleshooting>  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Message  
Meaning  
Suggested solutions  
Solving other problems  
Toner Page Count The toner page  
Reached, Replace count is expired.  
When the toner page  
count reached  
message appears on  
the screen, press  
Continue to continue  
The following chart lists some conditions that may occur and the  
recommended solutions. Follow the suggested solutions until the  
problem is corrected. If the problem persists, please call for service.  
Toner  
When the printed  
page related  
message appears  
on the screen, if you the printing job. Or  
select Continue,  
this message  
displays.  
Touch screen problem  
replace a toner  
cartridge with a  
Samsung-genuine  
toner cartridge.  
(Page 10.3)  
Condition  
Suggested solutions  
The touch screen • Adjust the screen by the brightness dial.  
does not show  
anything.  
(Page 1.4)  
• Turn the machine off and turn it on again. If  
the problem persists, please call for service.  
Toner Page Count The toner page  
Reached, Replace count has expired.  
Replace a toner  
cartridge with a  
Samsung-genuine  
toner cartridge.  
(Page 10.3)  
Toner1  
When the printed  
page related  
Paper feeding problems  
message appears  
on the screen, if you  
press Stop, this  
message displays.  
Condition  
Suggested solutions  
Paper is jammed  
during printing.  
Clear the paper jam. (Page 11.2)  
Toner Sensor  
Error  
The drum cartridge  
has some  
mechanical problem. the problem persists,  
replace the drum  
Turn the machine off  
and turn it on again. If  
Paper sticks  
together.  
• Ensure that there is not too much paper in the  
tray. The tray can hold up to 520 sheets of  
paper, depending on the thickness of the  
paper.  
cartridge.  
• Make sure that you are using the correct type  
of paper. (Page 4.3)  
• Remove paper from the tray and flex or fan  
the paper.  
Toner Supply error Not supplied toner to • Remove the sealing  
the drum cartridge.  
tape from the drum  
cartridge, and  
check the lever for  
the shutter on the  
toner cartridge.  
• Thoroughly roll the  
toner cartridge five  
or six times, and  
reinstall it.  
• Turn the machine  
off and turn it on  
again.  
• Humid conditions may cause some paper to  
stick together.  
Multiple sheets of • Different types of paper may be stacked in the  
paper do not  
feed.  
tray. Load paper of only one type, size, and  
weight.  
• If multiple sheets have caused a paper jam,  
clear the paper jam. (Page 11.2)  
Paper does not  
feed into the  
machine.  
• Remove any obstructions from inside the  
machine.  
• Paper has not been loaded correctly. Remove  
paper from the tray and reload it correctly.  
• There is too much paper in the tray. Remove  
excess paper from the tray.  
USE AUXILIARY  
ACCESS  
The credit is not  
enough to access  
the job according to  
Foreign Device.  
Insert credit into the  
Foreign Device.  
• The paper is too thick. Use only paper that  
meets the specifications required by the  
machine. (Page 4.3)  
• If an original does not feed into the machine,  
the DADF rubber pad may require to be  
replaced. Contact a service representative.  
11.13  
<
Troubleshooting>  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Printing problems  
Condition  
Suggested solutions  
The paper keeps  
jamming.  
• There is too much paper in the tray. Remove  
excess paper from the tray. If you are printing  
on special materials, use the multi-purpose  
tray.  
• An incorrect type of paper is being used. Use  
only paper that meets the specifications  
required by the machine. (Page 4.3)  
• There may be debris inside the machine.  
Open the front cover and remove the debris.  
• If an original does not feed into the machine,  
the DADF rubber pad may need to be  
replaced. Contact a service representative.  
Condition  
Possible cause  
Suggested solutions  
The  
The machine is not  
receiving power.  
Check the power cord  
connections. Check the  
power switch and the power  
source.  
machine  
does not  
print.  
The machine is not  
selected as the  
default printer.  
Select Samsung SCX-6x45  
Series PCL 6 or Samsung  
SCX-6x45 Series PS as your  
default printer in your  
Windows.  
Check the machine for the following:  
Transparencies  
stick together in  
the paper exit.  
Use only transparencies specifically designed  
for laser printers. Remove each transparency as  
it exits from the machine.  
• The side cover is not closed. Close the side cover.  
• Paper is jammed. Clear the paper jam. (Page 11.2)  
• No paper is loaded. Load paper. (Page 4.5)  
• The toner cartridge or the drum cartridge is not  
installed. Install the toner cartridge or the drum  
cartridge.  
Envelopes skew  
or fail to feed  
correctly.  
Ensure that the paper guides are against both  
sides of the envelopes.  
If a system error occurs, contact your service  
representative.  
The connection cable Disconnect the printer cable  
between the  
and reconnect it.  
computer and the  
machine is not  
connected properly.  
The connection cable If possible, attach the cable  
between the  
computer and the  
to another computer that is  
working properly and print a  
machine is defective. job. You can also try using a  
different printer cable.  
The port setting is  
incorrect.  
Check the Windows printer  
setting to make sure that the  
print job is sent to the correct  
port. If the computer has  
more than one port, make  
sure that the machine is  
attached to the correct one.  
The machine may be Check the printer properties  
configured  
incorrectly.  
to ensure that all of the print  
settings are correct.  
The printer driver  
may be incorrectly  
installed.  
Repair the printer software.  
See Software section.  
The machine is  
malfunctioning.  
Check the display message  
on the control panel to see if  
the machine is indicating a  
system error. Contact a  
service representative.  
11.14  
<
Troubleshooting>  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Condition  
Possible cause  
Suggested solutions  
Condition  
Possible cause  
Suggested solutions  
The  
machine  
selectsprint printer properties  
materials  
from the  
wrong  
paper  
source.  
The paper option that For many software  
The  
The printer cable is  
loose or defective.  
Disconnect the printer cable  
and reconnect. Try a print job  
that you have already printed  
successfully. If possible,  
attach the cable and the  
machine to another computer  
and try a print job that you  
know works. Finally, try a  
new printer cable.  
was selected in the  
applications, the paper  
source selection is found  
under the Paper tab within  
the printer properties. Select  
the correct paper source.  
See the printer driver help  
screen.  
machine  
prints, but  
the text is  
wrong,  
garbled, or  
incomplete.  
may be incorrect.  
A print job  
isextremely complex.  
slow.  
The job may be very  
Reduce the complexity of the  
page or try adjusting the print  
quality settings.  
The wrong printer  
driver was selected.  
Check the application’s  
printer selection menu to  
ensure that your machine is  
selected.  
If you are using  
From the Start menu, choose  
Settings and then Printers.  
Right-click the Samsung  
SCX-6x45 Series PCL 6 or  
Samsung SCX-6x45 Series  
PS machine icon, choose  
Properties, click the Details  
tab, and then choose the  
Spool Settings button.  
Select the desired spool  
setting.  
Windows 98/Me, the  
Spool Settings may  
be set incorrectly.  
The software  
application is  
malfunctioning.  
Try printing a job from  
another application.  
The operating system Exit Windows and reboot the  
is malfunctioning.  
computer. Turn the machine  
off and then back on again.  
Pagesprint, The toner cartridge is Redistribute the toner, if  
but they are defective or out of  
necessary.  
blank.  
toner.  
Half the  
page is  
blank.  
The page orientation  
setting may be  
incorrect.  
Change the page orientation  
in your application. See the  
printer driver help screen.  
If necessary, replace the  
toner cartridge.  
The file may have  
blank pages.  
Check the file to ensure that  
it does not contain blank  
pages.  
The paper size and  
the paper size  
settings do not  
match.  
Ensure that the paper size in  
the printer driver settings  
matches the paper in the  
tray.  
Some parts, such as  
the controller or the  
board, may be  
Contact a service  
representative.  
Or, ensure that the paper  
size in the printer driver  
settings matches the paper  
selection in the software  
application settings you use.  
defective.  
When you  
are using  
Windows  
98, the  
illustrations  
print  
The setting in the  
software application  
is wrong.  
Select Download as Bitmap  
in the Advanced Options  
window of the graphic  
properties and print the  
document again.  
incorrectly  
from Adobe  
Illustrator.  
PDF file  
does not  
print  
correctly-  
some parts  
are missing  
in the  
Incompatibility  
between the PDF file image may enable the file to  
and the Acrobat  
products.  
Printing the PDF file as an  
print. Turn on Print As Image  
from the Acrobat printing  
options.  
Note: It will take longer to  
print when you print a PDF  
file as an image.  
graphics,  
text or  
illustrations.  
11.15  
<
Troubleshooting>  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Printing quality problems  
Condition  
Suggested solutions  
If the inside of the machine is dirty or paper has been loaded improperly,  
you may notice a reduction in print quality. See the table below to clear  
the problem.  
White Spots  
White spots appears on the page:  
• The paper is too rough and a lot of dirt from  
a paper falls to the inner devices within the  
machine, so the transfer roller may be dirty.  
Clean the inside of your machine.  
(Page 10.2) Contact a service  
Condition  
Suggested solutions  
Light or faded print If a vertical white streak or faded area appears  
on the page:  
representative.  
• The paper path may need cleaning. Contact  
a service representative.  
• The toner supply is low. You may be able to  
temporarily extend the toner cartridge life. If  
this does not improve the print quality, install  
a new toner cartridge.  
• The paper may not meet paper  
specifications; for example, the paper may  
be too moist or rough. (Page 4.3)  
Vertical lines  
If black vertical streaks appear on the page:  
• The drum inside the printer has probably  
been scratched. Remove the drum cartridge  
and install a new one. (Page 10.4)  
• If the entire page is light, the print resolution  
setting is too low or the toner save mode is  
on. Adjust the print resolution and turn the  
toner save mode off. See the help screen of  
the printer driver and refer to Software  
section, respectively.  
• A combination of faded or smeared defects  
may indicate that the toner cartridge needs  
cleaning. Contact a service representative.  
• The surface of the LSU part inside the  
machine may be dirty. Clean the LSU,  
contact a service representative.  
If white vertical streaks appear on the page:  
• The surface of the LSU part inside the  
machine may be dirty. Clean the LSU.  
Contact a service representative.  
Gray background  
If the amount of background shading becomes  
unacceptable:  
• Change to a lighter weight paper. (Page 4.3)  
• Check the environmental conditions: very  
dry conditions (low humidity) or a high level  
of humidity (higher than 80% RH) can  
increase the amount of background  
shading.  
Toner specks  
• The paper may not meet specifications; for  
example, the paper may be too moist or  
rough. (Page 4.3)  
• Remove the old drum cartridge and then,  
install a new one. (Page 10.3)  
• The transfer roller may be dirty. Clean the  
inside of your machine. Contact a service  
representative.  
• The paper path may need cleaning. Contact  
a service representative.  
Toner smear  
• Clean the inside of the machine. Contact a  
service representative.  
• Check the paper type and quality.  
(Page 4.3)  
• Remove the drum cartridge and then, install  
a new one. (Page 10.3)  
Dropouts  
If faded areas, generally rounded, occur  
randomly on the page:  
• A single sheet of paper may be defective.  
Try reprinting the job.  
• The moisture content of the paper is uneven  
or the paper has moist spots on its surface.  
Try a different brand of paper. (Page 4.3)  
• The paper lot is bad. The manufacturing  
processes can cause some areas to reject  
toner. Try a different kind or brand of paper.  
• If these steps do not correct the problem,  
contact a service representative.  
11.16  
<
Troubleshooting>  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Condition  
Suggested solutions  
Condition  
Page skew  
Suggested solutions  
Vertical repetitive  
defects  
If marks repeatedly appear on the printed side  
of the page at even intervals:  
• Ensure that the paper is loaded properly.  
• Check the paper type and quality.  
(Page 4.3)  
• Ensure that the paper or other material is  
loaded correctly and the guides are not too  
tight or too loose against the paper stack.  
• The drum cartridge may be damaged. If a  
repetitive mark occurs on the page, run a  
cleaning sheet through several times to  
clean the cartridge; contact a service  
representative. After the printout, if you still  
have the same problems, remove the drum  
cartridge and then, install a new one.  
(Page 10.3)  
• Parts of the machine may have toner on  
them. If the defects occur on the back of the  
page, the problem will likely correct itself  
after a few more pages.  
Curl or wave  
• Ensure that the paper is loaded properly.  
• Check the paper type and quality. Both high  
temperature and humidity can cause paper  
curl. (Page 4.3)  
• Turn the stack of paper over in the tray. Also  
try rotating the paper 180° in the tray.  
• The fusing assembly may be damaged.  
Contact a service representative.  
Background scatter Background scatter results from bits of toner  
randomly distributed on the printed page.  
• The paper may be too damp. Try printing  
with a different batch of paper. Do not open  
packages of paper until necessary so that  
the paper does not absorb too much  
moisture.  
• If background scatter occurs on an  
envelope, change the printing layout to  
avoid printing over areas that have  
overlapping seams on the reverse side.  
Printing on seams can cause problems.  
• If background scatter covers the entire  
surface area of a printed page, adjust the  
print resolution through your software  
application or in printer properties.  
Wrinkles or creases • Ensure that the paper is loaded properly.  
• Check the paper type and quality.  
(Page 4.3)  
• Turn the stack of paper over in the tray. Also  
try rotating the paper 180° in the tray.  
Back of printouts  
are dirty  
Check for leaking toner. Clean the inside of  
the machine. Contact a service  
representative.  
Misformed  
characters  
• If characters are improperly formed and  
producing hollow images, the paper stock  
may be too slick. Try different paper.  
(Page 4.3)  
• If characters are improperly formed and  
producing a wavy effect, the scanner unit  
may need service. Contact a service  
representative.  
Black pages  
• The drum cartridge may not be installed  
properly. Remove the cartridge and reinsert  
it.  
• The drum cartridge may be defective and  
need replacing. Remove the drum cartridge  
and install a new one. (Page 10.3)  
• The machine may require repair. Contact a  
service representative.  
11.17  
<
Troubleshooting>  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Copying problems  
Condition  
Loose toner  
Suggested solutions  
• Clean the inside of the machine. Contact a  
service representative.  
Condition  
Suggested solutions  
Copies are too light Use Light and Dark arrows to darken or  
• Check the paper type and quality.  
(Page 4.3)  
or too dark.  
lighten the backgrounds of copies.  
• Remove the drum cartridge and then, install  
a new one. (Page 10.3)  
• If the problem persists, the machine may  
require repair. Contact a service  
representative.  
Smears, lines,  
marks, or spots  
appears on copies.  
• If the defects are on the original, press Light  
and Dark arrows to lighten the background  
of your copies.  
• If there are no defects on the original, clean  
the scan unit. (Page 10.2)  
Character Voids  
Character voids are white areas within parts of  
characters that should be solid black:  
Copy image is  
skewed.  
• Ensure that the original is face down on the  
scanner glass or face up in the DADF.  
• Check that the copy paper is loaded  
correctly.  
• If you are using transparencies, try another  
type of transparency. Because of the  
composition of transparencies, some  
character voids are normal.  
You may be printing on the wrong surface of  
the paper. Remove the paper and turn it  
around.  
Blank copies print  
out.  
Ensure that the original is face down on the  
scanner glass or face up in the DADF.  
Image rubs off the  
copy easily.  
• Replace the paper in the tray with paper  
from a new package.  
• In high humidity areas, do not leave paper in  
the machine for extended periods of time.  
• The paper may not meet paper  
specifications. (Page 4.3)  
Horizontal stripes  
If horizontally aligned black streaks or smears  
appear:  
Frequent copy  
paper jams occur.  
• Fan the stack of paper, then turn it over in  
the tray. Replace the paper in the tray with a  
fresh supply. Check/adjust the paper guides,  
if necessary.  
• The drum cartridge may be installed  
improperly. Remove the cartridge and  
reinsert it.  
• Ensure that the paper is the proper paper  
• The drum cartridge may be defective.  
Remove the toner cartridge and install a  
new one. (Page 10.3)  
weight. 75 g/m2 bond paper is  
recommended.  
• Check for copy paper or pieces of copy  
paper remaining in the machine after a  
paper jam has been cleared.  
• If the problem persists, the machine may  
require repair. Contact a service  
representative.  
Curl  
If the printed paper is curled or paper does not  
feed into the machine:  
Toner cartridge  
produces fewer  
copies than  
expected before  
running out of  
toner.  
Your originals may contain pictures, solids,  
or heavy lines. For example, your originals  
may be forms, newsletters, books, or other  
documents that use more toner.  
• The machine may be turned on and off  
frequently.  
• Turn the stack of paper over in the tray. Also  
try rotating the paper 180° in the tray.  
• The scanner lid may be left open while  
copies are being made.  
An unknown image  
You printer is probably being used at an  
repetitively appears altitude of 2,500 m (8,200 ft) or above. The  
on the next few  
sheets or loose  
toner, light print, or  
contamination  
occurs.  
high altitude may affect the print quality from  
loose toner or light imaging. You can set this  
option through Printer Settings Utility or the  
Printer Tab in printer driver’s properties. Refer  
to the Software section for detail.  
11.18  
<
Troubleshooting>  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Scanning problems  
Condition  
Suggested solutions  
Condition  
Suggested solutions  
Message appears • There may be a copying or printing job in  
on your computer  
screen:  
progress. Try your job again when that job is  
finished, try your job again.  
The scanner does • Make sure that you place the original to be  
not work.  
scanned face down on the scanner glass, or  
face up in the DADF.  
• The selected port is currently being used.  
Restart your computer and try again.  
• The printer cable may be improperly  
connected or the power may be off.  
• The scanner driver is not installed or the  
operating environment is not set up properly.  
• Ensure that the machine is properly  
connected and the power is on, then restart  
your computer.  
• “Device can't be  
set to the H/W  
mode you want.”  
• “Port is being  
used by another  
program.”  
• “Port is  
Disabled.”  
• “Scanner isbusy  
receiving or  
printing data.  
When the  
current job is  
completed, try  
again.”  
• “Invalid handle.”  
• “Scanning has  
failed.”  
• There may not be enough available memory  
to hold the document you want to scan. Try  
the Prescan function to see if that works. Try  
lowering the scan resolution rate.  
• Check that the printer cable is connected  
properly.  
• Make sure that the printer cable is not  
defective. Switch the cable with a known  
good cable. If necessary, replace the cable.  
• Check that the scanner is configured  
correctly. Check scan setting in the SmarThru  
Configuration or the application you want to  
use to make certain that the scanner job is  
being sent to the correct port.  
• The USB cable may be improperly connected  
or the power may be off.  
The unit scans  
very slowly.  
• Check if the machine is printing received  
data. If so, scan the document after the  
received data has been printed.  
• Graphics are scanned more slowly than text.  
• Communication speed slows in scan mode  
because of the large amount of memory  
required to analyze and reproduce the  
scanned image. Set your computer to the  
ECP printer mode through BIOS setting. It  
will help to increase the speed. For details  
about how to set BIOS, refer to your  
computer user’s guide.  
Network Scan problems  
Condition  
Suggested solutions  
I cannot find a  
scanned image  
file.  
You can check the destination for the scanned file  
on the Advanced page in the Network Scan  
program’s Properties screen.  
I cannot find the • Check if the scanned file is on your computer.  
scanned image  
file after  
scanning.  
• Check Send image immediately to the  
specified folder using an associated default  
application on the Advanced page in the  
Properties screen of the Network Scan  
program to open the scanned image  
immediately after scanning.  
I forgot my ID  
and PIN.  
Check your ID and PIN in the Server page in the  
Properties screen of the Network Scan program.  
I cannot view  
the Help file.  
To view the Help file, you need to have Internet  
Explorer 4 service pack 2 or above.  
I cannot use the Check your operating system. Supported  
Samsung  
Network Scan  
Manager  
operating systems are Windows 98/Me/NT 4.0/  
2000/XP/2003. (Page 2.1)  
11.19  
<
Troubleshooting>  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Fax problems  
Condition  
Suggested solutions  
Condition  
Suggested solutions  
The machine dials  
a number, but the  
connection with the Speak with the other machine operator and ask  
The other fax machine may be turned off, out  
of paper, or cannot answer incoming calls.  
The machine is not • Unplug the power cord and plug it in again.  
working, there is no  
display and the  
buttons are not  
working.  
• Ensure that there is power being supplied to  
the electrical outlet.  
other fax machine  
fails.  
her/him to solve out the problem.  
Faxes do not store There may not be enough memory space to  
in memory.  
store the fax. If the display shows the low  
memory message, delete any faxes you no  
longer need from the memory and then try to  
store the fax again. Please call for service.  
No dial tone  
sounds.  
• Check that the phone line is properly  
connected.  
• Check that the phone socket on the wall is  
working by plugging in another phone.  
Blank areas  
You may have chosen the wrong paper  
settings in the user option setting. For details  
about paper settings. (Page 4.8)  
appear at the  
bottom of each  
page or on other  
pages, with a small  
strip of text at the  
top.  
The numbers  
stored in memory  
do not dial  
Make sure that the numbers are stored in  
memory correctly. Print a Fax Phone Book.  
(Page 6.6)  
correctly.  
The original does  
not feed into the  
machine.  
• Make sure that the paper is not wrinkled and  
you are inserting it in correctly. Check that  
the original is the right size, not too thick or  
thin.  
• Make sure that the DADF is firmly closed.  
• The DADF rubber pad may need to be  
replaced. Contact a service representative.  
Common Windows problems  
Condition  
Suggested solutions  
Faxes are not  
received  
automatically.  
• The receiving mode should be set to Fax.  
• Make sure that there is paper in the tray.  
• Check to see if the display shows any error  
message. If it does, clear the problem.  
“File in Use”  
message appears  
during installation.  
Exit all software applications. Remove all  
software from the StartUp Group, then restart  
Windows. Reinstall the printer driver.  
“Error Writing to  
LPTx” message  
appears.  
• Ensure that the cables are connected  
correctly and the machine is on.  
• If bi-directional communication is not turned  
on in the driver, it will also cause this  
message.  
The machine does • Make sure that the original is loaded in the  
not send.  
DADF or on the scanner glass.  
• Check the fax machine you are sending to,  
to see if it can receive your fax.  
“General  
Close all other applications, reboot Windows  
and try printing again.  
The incoming fax  
has blank spaces  
or is of poor quality.  
• The fax machine sending you the fax may be  
faulty.  
• A noisy phone line can cause line errors.  
• Check your machine by making a copy.  
• The toner cartridge may be empty. Replace  
the toner cartridge, referring to page 10.3.  
Protection Fault”,  
“Exception OE”,  
“Spool32”, or  
“Illegal Operation”  
messages appear.  
“Fail To Print”, “A  
printer timeout  
error occurred.”  
messages appear.  
These messages may appear during printing.  
Just keep waiting until the machine finishes  
printing. If the message appears in standby  
mode or after printing has been completed,  
check the connection and/or whether an error  
has occurred.  
Stretched words  
appear on an  
incoming fax.  
The fax machine sending the fax had a  
temporary document jam.  
There are lines on  
the originals you  
sent.  
Check your scan unit for marks and clean it.  
(Page 10.2)  
Note  
Refer to Microsoft Windows 98/Me/NT 4.0/2000/XP/2003 User’s  
Guide that came with your PC for further information on  
Windows error messages.  
11.20  
<
Troubleshooting>  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Common PostScript problems  
Problem  
Possible Cause and Solution  
The following situations are PS language specific and may occur when  
several printer languages are being used.  
The machine does not  
print.  
• Check if the printer driver is installed in  
your system. Open the Unified Driver  
configuration tool and switch to the  
Printers tab in the Printers configuration  
window to look at the list of available  
printers. Make sure that your machine is  
displayed on the list. If not, use the Add  
new printer wizard to set up your device.  
• Check if the printer has started. Open  
Printers configuration and select your  
machine on the printers list. Look at the  
description in the Selected printer pane.  
If its status contains “(stopped)” string,  
please, press the Start button. After that,  
normal operation of the printer should be  
restored. The “stopped” status might be  
activated when some problems in  
printing occurred. For instance, this  
could be an attempt to print documents  
when the port is claimed by a scanning  
application.  
Note  
To receive a printed or screen-displayed message when  
PostScript errors occur, open the Print Options window and click  
the desired selection next to the PostScript errors section.  
Problem  
Possible Cause  
Solution  
PostScript file  
cannot be  
printed.  
The PostScript  
driver may not be  
installed correctly.  
• Install the PostScript  
driver, referring to  
Software section.  
• Print a configuration page  
and verify that the PS  
version is available for  
printing.  
• If the problem persists,  
contact a service  
representative.  
“Limit Check  
Errormessage too complex.  
appears.  
The print job was  
You might need to reduce  
the complexity of the page or  
install more memory.  
• Check if the port is not busy. Since  
functional components of MFP (printer  
and scanner) share the same I/O  
interface (port), the situation of  
A PostScript  
error page  
prints.  
The print job may  
not be PostScript.  
Make sure that the print job  
is a PostScript job. Check to  
see whether the software  
application expected a setup  
or PostScript header file to  
be sent to the machine.  
simultaneous access for different  
“consumer” application to the same port  
is possible. To avoid possible conflicts,  
only one of them is allowed to gain  
control over the device at a time. The  
other “consumer” will encounter “device  
busy” response. You should open the  
ports configuration and select the port  
assigned to your printer. In the Selected  
port pane you can see if the port is  
occupied by some other application. If  
this is the case, you should wait for  
completion of the current job or you  
should press the Release port button, if  
you are sure that the owner is not  
functioning properly.  
The optional  
tray is not  
selected in the  
driver.  
The printer driver  
has not been  
configured to  
recognize the  
optional tray.  
Open the PostScript driver  
properties, select the Device  
Settings tab, and set the  
Tray option of the Installable  
Options section to Installed  
.
When printing  
a document in  
Macintosh with  
Acrobat  
Reader 6.0 or  
higher, colors  
print  
The resolution  
setting in the  
printer driver may  
not be matched  
with the one in  
Acrobat Reader.  
Make sure that the resolution  
setting in your printer driver  
matches the one in Acrobat  
Reader.  
• Check if your application has special  
print options such as “-oraw”. If “-oraw”  
is specified in the command line  
incorrectly.  
parameter then remove it to print  
properly. For Gimp front-end, select  
“print” -> “Setup printer” and edit the  
command line parameter in the  
Common Linux problems  
Problem  
Possible Cause and Solution  
command item.  
The machine does not  
print.  
The CUPS (Common Unix Printing  
System) version distributed with SuSE  
Linux 9.2 (cups-1.1.21) has a problem with  
ipp (Internet Printing Protocol) printing.  
11.21  
<
Troubleshooting>  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
Problem  
Possible Cause and Solution  
Problem  
Possible Cause and Solution  
The machine does not  
appear on the  
scanners list.  
• Check if your machine is attached to  
your computer. Make sure that it is  
connected properly via the USB port and  
is turned on.  
The machine does not  
scan.  
• Check if a document is loaded into the  
machine.  
• Check if your machine is connected to  
the computer. Make sure it is connected  
properly if an I/O error is reported while  
scanning.  
• Check if the port is not busy. Since  
functional components of MFP (printer  
and scanner) share the same I/O  
interface (port), the situation of  
• Check if the scanner driver for your  
machine is installed in your system.  
Open the Unified Driver configuration  
tool, switch to Scanner configuration,  
then press Drivers. Make sure that the  
window lists a driver with a name  
corresponding to your machine's name.  
Check if the port is not busy. Since  
functional components of MFP (printer  
and scanner) share the same I/O  
interface (port), the situation of  
simultaneous access to different  
“consumer” applications using the same  
port is possible. To avoid possible  
conflicts, only one of them is allowed to  
gain control over the device at a time.  
The other “consumer” will encounter a  
“device busy” response. This usually  
happens while starting the scan  
simultaneous access for different  
“consumer” applications to the same  
port is possible. To avoid possible  
conflicts, only one of them is allowed to  
gain control over the device at a time.  
The other “consumer” will encounter  
“device busy” response. This usually  
happens while starting the scan  
procedure, and an appropriate message  
box will be displayed.  
To identify the source of the problem,  
you should open ports configuration and  
select the port assigned to your scanner.  
port’s symbol /dev/mfp0 corresponds to  
LP:0 designation displayed in the  
scanners’ options, /dev/mfp1 relates to  
LP:1 and so on. USB ports start at /dev/  
mfp4, so scanner on USB:0 relates to /  
dev/mfp4 respectively and so forth  
sequentially. In the Selected port pane  
you can see if the port is occupied by  
some other application. If this is the  
case, you should wait for completion of  
the current job or you should press the  
Release port button, if you are sure that  
the port owner is not functioning  
properly.  
procedure, and an appropriate message  
box appears.  
To identify the source of the problem,  
you should open ports configuration and  
select the port assigned to your scanner.  
The port symbol /dev/mfp0 corresponds  
to LP:0 designation displayed in the  
scanners’ options, /dev/mfp1 relates to  
LP:1 and so on. USB ports start at /dev/  
mfp4, so scanner on USB:0 relates to /  
dev/mfp4 respectively, and so forth  
sequentially. In the Selected port pane  
you can see if the port is occupied with  
some other application. If this is the  
case, you should wait for completion of  
the current job or you should press the  
Release port button, if you are sure that  
the port owner is not functioning  
properly.  
I cannot scan via Gimp • Check if Gimp Front-end has  
Front-end.  
“Xsane: Device dialog.” on the “Acquire”  
menu. If not, you should install the  
Xsane plug-in for Gimp on your  
computer. You can find Xsane plug-in  
package for Gimp on Linux distribution  
CDs or on the Gimp home page. For  
detailed information, refer to Help for  
Linux distribution CD or Gimp Front-end  
application.  
If you wish to use an other kinds of scan  
applications, refer to the Help for  
application.  
11.22  
<
Troubleshooting>  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Problem  
Possible Cause and Solution  
I encounter error  
“Cannot open port  
device file” when  
printing a document.  
Please avoid changing print job  
parameters (via LPR GUI, for example)  
while a print job is in progress. Known  
versions of CUPS server cut off the print  
jobs whenever print options are changed  
and then try to restart the job from the  
beginning. Since Unified Linux Driver locks  
port while printing, the abrupt termination  
of the driver keeps the port locked and  
therefore unavailable for subsequent print  
jobs. If this situation occurred, try to  
release the port.  
Common Macintosh problems  
Problem  
Suggested solutions  
PDF file does not print  
correctly-some parts are  
missing in the graphics,  
text or illustrations.  
Incompatibility between the PDF file and  
the Acrobat products.  
Printing the PDF file as an image may  
enable the file to print. Turn on Print As  
Image from the Acrobat printing options.  
Note: It will take longer to print when  
you print a PDF file as an image.  
The document has  
printed, but the print job  
has not disappeared from  
the spooler in  
Update your Mac OS to OS 10.3.3. or  
higher.  
Mac OS 10.3.2.  
Some letters are not  
displayed normally  
during the cover page  
printing.  
This problem is caused because Mac  
OS cannot find the font during the cover  
page printing. English alphabet and  
numbers are displayed normally at the  
cover page.  
11.23  
<
Troubleshooting>  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Accessories  
12Ordering supplies and  
accessories  
You can purchase and install accessories to enhance your machine’s  
performance and capacity.  
This chapter provides information on purchasing cartridges and  
accessories available for your machine.  
The following accessories are available for your machine:  
Accessory  
Description  
Part number  
This chapter includes:  
Toner cartridge  
Drum cartridge  
Accessories  
Memory  
DIMM  
Extends your machine’s  
memory capacity.  
ML-MEM140: 256 MB  
Note: This machine  
comes with 128 MB of  
on-board memory and a  
128 MB DIMM. To  
How to purchase  
expand the memory of  
your machine, you must  
remove the existing  
DIMM and purchase a  
larger one.  
Toner cartridge  
When the toner runs out, you can order the following type of toner  
cartridge for your machine:  
a
Fax option kit This kit lets you use your • Serial Type : SCX-  
a
machine as a fax  
machine.  
FAX100  
• Parallel Type: SCX-  
FAX101  
Type  
Average yield  
Part number  
SCX-D6345A  
Standard yield  
Approx.  
20,000 pages  
Note:Afterinstallingthe  
kit, you have to set up  
your machine to activate  
this machine. (See  
Page 13.3)  
a. Declared yield value in accordance with ISO/IEC 19752.  
Drum cartridge  
Optional tray If you are experiencing  
SCX-S6345A  
When the drum runs out, you can order the following type of drum  
cartridge for your machine:  
2/3/4  
frequent paper supply  
problems, you can  
attach an additional 520  
sheet tray. You can print  
documents in various  
sizes and types of print  
materials.  
a
Type  
Average yield  
Part number  
SCX-R6345A  
Standard yield  
Approx.  
60,000 pages  
a. Declared yield value is based on a single side of A4- or letter-sized paper.  
Stand  
You can place the  
machine on the  
Tall Stand: SCX-  
DSK10T  
• Short Stand: SCX-  
DSK10S  
Note: If you do not use  
the optional tray then  
Tall Stand is  
recommended. In case  
you add three optional  
trays, use Short Stand.  
Note  
ergonomically-designed  
cabinet which lets you  
reach the machine  
conveniently. Also, you  
can easily move the  
cabinet with its wheels, if  
necessary, and store  
miscellaneous items like  
papers into the cabinet.  
Depending on the options and job mode, the drum cartridge's  
lifespan may differ.  
Stacker &  
Stapler  
500 sheets  
SCX-FIN10S  
(Finisher)  
12.1  
<
Ordering supplies and accesso-  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                         
Accessory  
Description  
Part number  
SCX-STP000  
Staple  
Cartridge  
3 x 5,000 staples per  
package, covers  
maximum thickness of  
50 sheets, 1 staple  
position.  
SmarThru  
WorkFlow  
Windows 2000/XP/2003. SCX-KIT11S  
This feature lets you  
send additional  
information along with  
the scanned document  
to a specified network  
location.  
FDI (Foreign  
Device  
Interface) kit  
This card is installed  
inside the machine to  
allow a third party device  
such as a coin operated  
device or a card reader.  
Those devices allow the  
pay-for-print service on  
your machine.  
SCX-KIT10F  
a.Countries which supports the serial telephone system are Germany, Italia,  
France, Sweden, Denmark, Finland, Austria, Switzerland, Belgium, Hungary.  
How to purchase  
To order Samsung-authorized supplies or accessories, contact your local  
Samsung dealer or the retailer where you purchased your machine, or  
visit www.samsungprinter.com and select your country/region to obtain  
information on calling for technical support.  
12.2  
<
Ordering supplies and accesso-  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
2
Open the control board cover by grasping it and slide toward you.  
13 Installing accessories  
Your machine is a full-featured model that has been optimized to meet  
most of your printing needs. Recognizing that each user may have  
different requirements, however, Samsung makes several accessories  
available to enhance your machine’s capabilities.  
This chapter includes:  
Precautions to take when installing accessories  
Installing a memory DIMM  
1
Replacing the Stapler  
Enabling Fax feature after installing the fax option kit  
control board cover  
1
Precautions to take when installing accessories  
3
Completely open the latch on each side of the DIMM slot. Remove  
the preinstalled memory DIMM.  
Disconnect the power cord  
Never remove the control board cover while the power is being supplied  
on.  
To avoid the possibility of an electrical shock, always disconnect the  
power cord when installing or removing ANY internal or external  
accessories.  
1
2
Discharge static electricity  
The control board and internal accessories (network interface card or  
memory DIMM) are sensitive to static electricity. Before installing or  
removing any internal accessories, discharge static electricity from your  
body by touching something metal, such as the metal back plate on any  
device plugged into a grounded power source. If you walk round before  
finishing the installation, repeat this procedure to discharge any static  
electricity again.  
latch  
1
2
memory DIMM  
4
5
Take out a new memory DIMM from the plastic bag.  
Installing a memory DIMM  
Holding the memory DIMM by the edges, align the notches on the  
memory DIMM with the grooves on the memory DIMM slot.  
Your machine has a dual in-line memory module (DIMM) slot. Use this  
DIMM slot to install additional memory.  
Your machine has 256 MB of memory which can be expanded to 384 MB.  
The order information is provided for optional memory DIMM.  
(Page 12.1)  
1
Turn the machine off and unplug all cables from the machine.  
Note  
The notches and grooves illustrated above may not match  
those on an actual DIMM and its slot.  
13.1  
<
Installing accessories>  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
6
Push the DIMM straight into the DIMM slot until it snaps into place.  
Make sure the latches fit over the notches located on either side of  
the DIMM.  
7
8
Select the amount of memory you installed from Printer Memory in  
the Installable Options section.  
For Windows 98, select Installable Options > VMOption > change  
setting for:VMOption > change memory.  
Click OK.  
Replacing the Stapler  
When the stapler is completely empty, the message for installing the  
staple cartridge appears on the display screen.  
7
Replace the control board cover.  
1
Open the finisher cover.  
8
Reconnect the power cord and printer cable, and turn the machine  
on.  
2
Pull the stapler unit out.  
Activating the added memory in the PS printer  
properties  
After installing the memory DIMM, you need to select it in the printer  
properties of the PostScript printer driver in order to use it.  
1
Make sure that the PostScript printer driver is installed on your  
computer. For details about installing the PS printer driver, see  
Software section.  
2
3
Click the Windows Start menu.  
For Windows 98/Me/NT 4.0/2000, select Settings and then  
Printers.  
For Windows XP/2003, select Printers and Faxes.  
4
5
Select the Samsung SCX-6x45 Series PS printer.  
Click the right mouse button on the machine icon and select  
Properties.  
6
For Windows 98/Me, select Device Options.  
For Windows NT 4.0/2000/XP/2003, select Device Settings.  
13.2  
<
Installing accessories>  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
3
Lift the empty staple cartridge from the stapler unit.  
4
5
6
7
Press the Setup tab > Optional Service.  
Press Analog Fax .  
Set the option to Enable  
.
Press OK.  
4
5
Unpack the new staple cartridge.  
Place the staple cartridge back into the stapler unit.  
6
Slide the stapler unit in until it locks in place.  
7
Close the finisher cover.  
Enabling Fax feature after installing the fax  
option kit  
After installing the Fax kit, you have to set up the machine in order to use  
this function.  
1
2
3
Press Machine Setup on the control panel.  
Press Admin Setting.  
When the login message appears, enter password with number  
keypad and press OK. (Page 3.3)  
13.3  
<
Installing accessories>  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Item  
Description  
14Specifications  
c
Toner cartridge yield  
Average Cartridge Yield 20,000 standard  
pages. Declared yield value in accordance  
with ISO/IEC 19752.  
This chapter includes:  
General specifications  
Printer specifications  
d
Drum cartridge yield  
Approx. 60,000 pages  
256 MB (max. 384 MB)  
Copier specifications  
Memory  
Scanner specifications  
Facsimile specifications (optional)  
External dimension  
(W x D x H)  
637.4 x 489 x 616mm (without optional  
trays), 25 x 19.25 x 24.25 inches  
Weight  
44.5 Kg (including consumables)  
Paper: 5.4 Kg, Plastic: 1.2 Kg  
General specifications  
Package weight  
Duty cycle  
Monthly print volume: Up to 200,000 pages  
Item  
Description  
a.For details about paper input capacity, see page 4.3.  
b. Sound Pressure Level, ISO 7779  
DADF  
Up to 50 sheets (75 g/m2)  
c. Average cartridge yield declared in accordance with ISO/IEC 19752. The  
number of pages may be affected by the operating environment, printing  
interval, media type, and media size.  
DADF document size Width: 148.5 to 218 mm  
Length: 145 to 356 mm  
d. May be affected by operating environment, optional, printing interval, media  
type and media size.  
a
Paper input capacity  
• Tray 1: 520 multi-page for plain paper  
(75 g/m )  
2
• Multi-purpose tray: 100 multi-page for plain  
2
paper (75 g/m )  
Printer specifications  
• optional tray 2/3/4: 520 multi-page for plain  
2
paper (75 g/m )  
Item  
Description  
Laser Beam Printing  
Paper output  
capacity  
• 500 sheets (face down)  
• 500 sheets (optional stacker)  
Printing method  
a
Consumables  
Power rating  
2-piece toner/drum cartridge system  
Printing speed  
Up to 43 ppm in A4 (45 ppm in Letter)  
Up to 40 ipm in A4 (42 ipm in Letter)  
110 - 127 VAC, or  
220 - 240 VAC  
Duplex printing  
speed  
See the Rating label on the machine for the  
correct voltage, frequency (hertz) and type of  
current for your machine.  
First print out time  
Print resolution  
Printer language  
8 seconds (from ready)  
Up to 1,200 x 1,200 dpi Effective output  
PCL 6, PS 3  
Power consumption  
Average operation mode: Less than 900 W  
Power save mode: Less than 35 W  
Stand by mode: Less than 170 W  
b
OS compatibility  
• PCL Driver: Windows 98/Me/NT 4.0/2000/  
XP(32/64bit)/2003 Server(32/64bit)  
b
• PS Driver: Windows 98/Me/NT 4.0/2000/  
XP(32/64bit)/2003 Server(32/64bit), Various  
Linux OS, Macintosh 10.3 ~ 10.4  
Noise level  
Standby mode: Less than 43 dBA  
Printing mode: Less than 60 dBA  
Copying mode: Less than 62 dBA  
Interface  
High Speed USB 2.0  
Warm-up time  
Less than 35 seconds (from sleep mode)  
Ethernet 10/100 Base TX  
Operating  
environment  
Temperature: 10 °C to 32 °C  
Humidity: 20% to 80% RH  
a. Print speed will be affected by operating system used, computing performance,  
application software, connect on method, media type, media size, and job  
complexity.  
Display  
1/2 VGA (640 x 240)  
b. Please visit www.samsungprinter.com to download the latest software version.  
14.1  
<
Specifications>  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
Copier specifications  
Scanner specifications  
Item  
Description  
Item  
Description  
a
Copy speed  
Up to 43 cpm in A4 (45 cpm in Letter)  
Compatibility  
TWAIN standard / WIA standard  
Duplex copy speed • Simplex to Duplex (1-2): Up to 40 ipm in A4  
(42 ipm in Letter)  
Scanning method  
DADF and Flat-bed Color CCD (Charge  
Coupled Device) module  
• Duplex to Duplex (2-2): Up to 14 ipm in A4  
(17 ipm in Letter)  
Resolution  
Optical: 600 x 600 dpi (mono and color)  
Enhanced: 4,800 x 4,800 dpi  
First copy out time  
Copy resolution  
Scanner glass: Less than 5 seconds  
DADF: Less than 8 seconds  
Effective scanning  
length  
Scanner glass: 348 mm  
DADF: 348 mm  
Scan: up to 600 x 300 (text, text/photo)  
up to 600 x 600 (photo)  
Print: up to 600 x 600 (text, text/photo, photo)  
Effective scanning  
width  
Max. 208 mm  
Color bit depth  
Internal: 36 bits  
External: 24 bits  
Zoom rate  
Scanner glass: 25 to 400%  
DADF: 25 to 200%  
Mono bit depth  
1 bit for Linearity & Halftone  
Multiple copies  
1 to 999 pages  
8 bits (External), 12 bits (Internal) for Gray  
scale  
a. Copy speed is based on single document multiple copy.  
Grayscale  
256 levels  
14.2  
<
Specifications>  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Facsimile specifications (optional)  
Item  
Description  
ITU-T G3, Super G3  
Compatibility  
Applicable line  
Public Switched Telephone Network (PSTN)  
or behind PABX  
Data coding  
MH/MR/MMR/JBIG/JPEG (Tx only)  
33.6 Kbps  
Modem speed  
a
Transmission  
speed  
Up to 3 seconds/page  
Maximum  
Scanner glass: 356 mm  
document length  
Duplex automatic document glass: 356 mm  
Resolution  
• Standard: 203 x 98 dpi  
• Fine: 203 x 196 dpi  
• Super Fine: 300 x 300 dpi, 406 x 392 dpi,  
b
203 x 392 dpi (Rx only)  
Memory  
16 MB  
Halftone  
Auto dialer  
256 levels  
up to 200 numbers  
a. Standard resolution, MMR(JBIG), Maximum modem speed, Phase"C" by ITU-T  
No.1 chart, Memory Tx, ECM.  
b. Rx stands for receiving a fax.  
14.3  
<
Specifications>  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
INDEX  
solving copy problems 11.18  
text/photo 5.4  
the size of the originals 5.2  
time & date 9.3  
scanning 7.6  
A
Admin Setting 1.7  
admin setting 9.1  
altitude adjustment 9.3  
answering machine/fax 6.4  
authentication  
transparencies 5.6  
email address  
entering email addresses to input field 7.4  
copy setup 9.3  
network accounting 9.6  
Global 7.4  
Group 7.4  
Individual 7.3  
printing a report 9.2 9.7  
D
setting up 3.3  
,
9.2  
auto center 5.7  
storing 7.3  
cover 1.2  
input tray 1.2  
output tray 1.2  
width guides 1.2  
energy saver 3.4  
erasing background  
copying 5.7  
B
faxing 6.6  
Book copy 5.5  
darkness  
scanning 7.8  
copying 5.4  
faxing 6.6  
scanning 7.8  
erasing punch hole 5.7  
error correction mode 9.4  
error message 11.8  
EXT socket 1.3  
extension telephone 6.4  
C
CCD Lock 1.2  
date & time 3.4 9.2  
,
checking stored document 10.2  
cleaning  
printing date&time in copied out 9.2  
default settings 3.5  
altitude adjustment 9.3  
changing the default settings 3.5  
energy saver 9.3  
language 9.2  
inside 10.2  
outside 10.2  
scan unit 10.2  
transfer unit 10.2  
Clear 1.4  
Clear All 1.4  
Clone copy 5.5  
collated 5.3  
fax option kit  
enabling option feature after installing the  
kit 13.3  
ordering 12.1  
loading paper 3.5  
machine test 9.3  
measurements 9.2  
output option 9.3  
setting a fax header 6.2  
sound 9.3  
supplies management 9.3  
system timeout 9.2  
tray management 9.3  
tray setting 3.5  
fax receiving  
changing the receive mode 6.4  
extension telephone 6.4  
in answering machine/fax 6.4  
in memory 6.5  
color mode  
faxing 6.6  
scanning 7.7  
control panel 1.2  
copy  
,
1.4  
receiving in duplex 6.5  
secure receiving 6.5  
fax sending  
copying 5.2  
covers 5.6  
duplex copy 5.3  
erasing background 5.7  
erasing edge 5.7  
ID stamp 9.4  
making a booklet 5.6  
page number 9.3  
poster 5.5  
reduce/enlarge 5.3  
shifting margin 5.7  
display screen 1.4  
driver  
automatic resending 6.3  
delay sending 6.3  
duplex sending 6.2  
redialing the last number 6.3  
sending a fax 6.2  
feature 2.2  
help i  
installation 3.2  
drum cartridge 1.2  
drum reorder notification 10.1  
duplex  
sending a fax manually 6.3  
sending a priority fax 6.4  
setting a fax header 6.2  
fax setup 9.4  
copying 5.3  
faxing 6.5  
1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
faxing  
color mode 6.6  
clearing paper from the tray1 11.2  
clearing the original from DADF 11.1  
clearing the original from scanner glass  
11.2  
N
NetScan 7.5  
network  
darkness 6.6  
duplex 6.5  
enabling the fax kit option 9.7  
erasing background 6.6  
original type 6.6  
phonebook 6.6  
printing a fax report 10.1  
resolution 6.5  
port 1.3  
requirements 3.2  
setting up 3.1 9.5  
,
13.3  
tips for avoiding paper jams 11.8  
Job Status 1.4  
,
1.7  
,
JPEG 7.8  
Network Printer User’s Guide i  
notification  
receiving a fax in Mailbox 6.9  
number keypad 1.4  
N-up copy 5.4  
solving faxing problems 11.20  
keyboard 3.5  
FDI  
authentication 9.6  
dummy 1.3  
FDI (Foreign Interface Device)  
ordering 12.2  
finisher (Stacker & Stapler)  
connection 1.3  
cover 1.3  
O
language 3.4  
LED 1.4  
OCR 7.8  
On Hook Dial 1.4  
hardware 1.4  
sending a fax 6.3  
Online User’s Guide i  
optional service 9.6  
optional tray 1.2 12.1  
ordering supplies 12.1  
original size  
Interrupt 1.5  
Power Saver 1.5  
Status 1.6  
ordering 12.1  
LINE socket 1.3  
Linux  
problems 11.21  
requirements 2.3  
output tray 1.3  
paper jam 11.7  
front cover 1.2  
FTP 7.5  
,
copying 5.2  
scanning 7.7  
original type  
G
copying 5.4  
faxing 6.6  
scanning 7.7  
Machine Info 9.1  
general settings 9.2  
Gray scan 7.7  
Group  
Machine Setup 1.4 1.7, 9.1  
,
machine status 9.1  
Machine Status 1.7  
Macintosh  
problems 11.23  
requirements 2.3  
Mailbox  
originals 4.1  
Group fax number 6.7  
clearing jam 11.1  
loading in the DADF 4.1  
loading on the scanner glass 4.1  
output options 9.3  
I
ID copy 5.4  
creating Mailbox 6.9  
deleting the data of the Mailbox 6.9  
Mailbox List 6.9  
Mailbox No. 6.8  
Mailbox Passcode 6.8  
polling 6.8  
ID stamp in copying 9.4  
Individual  
P
email addresses for scanning 7.3  
individual fax number 6.6  
page numbering in copying 9.3  
paper  
Interrupt 1.4  
changing the size 4.6  
clearing jam 11.2  
printing a Mailbox 6.9  
sending to remote Mailbox 6.9  
storing the originals 6.9  
Maintenance 10.1  
drum cartridge 10.4  
maintenance parts 10.6  
toner cartridge 10.3  
memory DIMM  
loading in the multi-purpose tray 4.6  
loading in the optional tray 4.5  
loading in the tray1 4.5  
paper feeding problems 11.13  
setting the paper size of the tray 4.8  
phonebook  
J
jam  
clearing paper from the duplex unit area  
11.6  
clearing paper from the exit area 11.6  
clearing paper from the fuser unit 11.5  
clearing paper from the multi-purpose tray  
11.5  
fax 6.6  
installing 13.1  
ordering 12.1  
fax phonebook from SyncThru Web Ser-  
vice 6.7  
clearing paper from the optional tray 11.3  
clearing paper from the stacker (finisher)  
11.7  
clearing paper from the toner cartridge  
11.5  
message on the display screen 11.8  
Mono 7.7  
multi-purpose tray 1.2  
polling  
deleting the polling document 6.8  
polling a remote fax 6.8  
polling from remote Mailbox 6.8  
printing the polling document 6.8  
2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
storing the originals for polling 6.8  
PostScript  
Stop 1.4  
stored documents 10.2  
supplied software 2.1  
supplies  
Redial/Pause 1.4  
remote code 9.4  
remote service 9.7  
replacing components  
drum cartridge 10.4  
toner cartridge 10.3  
replacing stapler 13.2  
Report 9.7  
driver features 2.2  
problems 11.21  
Power Save 3.4  
Power Saver 1.4  
hardware 1.4  
browsing the supplies life 9.1  
checking the supplies life 10.1  
expected drum cartridge life 9.3  
expected toner cartridge life 9.3  
management 9.3  
,
1.5  
1.5  
,
,
,
10.4  
10.3  
using power save mode 3.4  
Power switch 1.3  
print media  
,
ordering supplies 12.1  
Supplies Management 9.3  
SyncThru Web Service 10.6  
email address 7.3  
Resolution  
guidelines 4.4  
media sizes 4.4  
selecting print media 4.2  
specification 4.3  
faxing 6.5  
scanning 7.7  
fax settings 6.7  
print/report  
SMB/FTP setting 7.5  
System timeout 3.4  
accounting reports 9.7  
configuration report 9.8  
Samsung site i  
scan preset 7.8  
Scan to Email 7.3  
confirmation 9.8  
Scan to Server 7.5  
confirmation 9.8  
scanned file format 7.8  
scanner lid 1.2  
e-mail confirmation report 9.8  
fax report 9.8 10.1  
from the website 10.6  
network auth. log report 9.7  
network configuration 9.7  
PCL font list 9.7  
,
telephone 6.4  
terminal ID 9.4  
TIFF 7.8  
toner cartridge 1.2  
toner reorder notification 10.1  
touch screen 1.4  
problem solving 11.13  
tray  
PS3 font list 9.7  
scanning  
scan report 10.1  
color mode 7.7  
darkness 7.8  
enabling the scan kit option 9.6  
erasing background 7.8  
file format 7.8  
original size 7.7  
original type 7.7  
printing an email report 10.1  
quality 7.8  
resolution 7.7  
scan to server confirmation 9.8  
Schedule jobs report 9.7  
supplies information 9.7  
system report 10.1  
usage page report 9.7  
Printer Driver Help i  
Printer software CD 2.1  
printing 8.1  
adjusting the width and length 4.6  
optional tray 1.2  
tray1 1.2  
troubleshooting 11.1  
problem solving 11.14  
problems  
USB  
scan preset 7.8  
copying 11.18  
sending it via email 7.3  
sending it via FTP 7.5  
sending it via Network Scan Manager 7.5  
sending it via SMB 7.5  
solving scanning problems 11.19  
screen brightness dial 1.4  
serial number 10.1  
service center registration 9.2  
shifting margin 5.7  
side cover 1.2  
port 1.3  
display message 11.8  
faxing 11.20  
Linux 11.21  
Macintosh 11.23  
W
network scanning 11.19  
paper feeder 11.13  
PostScript 11.21  
printing 11.14  
printing quality 11.16  
scanning 11.19  
Windows  
problems 11.20  
requirements 2.2  
SMB 7.5  
sound 9.3  
touch screen 11.13  
Windows 11.20  
specifications 14.1  
speed dial no. 6.6  
Stacker 12.1  
Q
stand 1.2 12.1  
,
quality  
staple cartridge  
ordering 12.2  
replacing 13.2  
Start 1.4  
scanning 7.8  
solving the printing problem 11.16  
Quick Install Guide i  
3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Samsung Printer  
Software section  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SOFTWARE SECTION  
CONTENTS  
1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Typical Installation  
1
Installing Printer  
Software in Windows  
This is recommended for most users. All components necessary  
for printer operations will be installed.  
1
2
Make sure that the printer is connected to your computer  
and powered on.  
This chapter includes:  
Insert the supplied CD-ROM into your CD-ROM drive.  
The CD-ROM should automatically run, and an installation  
window appears.  
If the installation window does not appear, click Start and  
then Run. Type X:\Setup.exe, replacing “X” with the  
letter which represents your drive and click OK  
.
Installing Printer Software  
You can install the printer software for local printing or network  
printing. To install the printer software on the computer,  
perform the appropriate installation procedure depending on  
the printer in use.  
A printer driver is software that lets your computer  
communicate with your printer. The procedure to install drivers  
may differ depending on the operating system you are using.  
All applications should be closed on your PC before beginning  
installation.  
Installing Software for Local Printing  
3
4
Click Next.  
• If necessary, select a language from the drop-down list.  
A local printer is a printer directly attached to your computer  
using the printer cable supplied with your printer, such as a USB  
or parallel cable. If your printer is attached to a network, skip  
page 8.  
Select Typical installation for a local printer. Click  
Next  
.
You can install the printer software using the typical or custom  
method.  
NOTE: If the “New Hardware Wizard” window appears during  
the installation procedure, click  
in the upper right corner of  
the box to close the window, or click Cancel  
.
5
Installing Printer Software in Windows  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
NOTE: After setup is complete, if your printer driver doesn’t  
work properly, reinstall the printer driver. See “Reinstalling  
NOTE: If your printer is not already connected to the  
computer, the following window will appear.  
Custom Installation  
You can choose individual components to install.  
1
2
Make sure that the printer is connected to your computer  
and powered on.  
Insert the supplied CD-ROM into your CD-ROM drive.  
The CD-ROM should automatically run, and an installation  
window appears.  
If the installation window does not appear, click Start and  
then Run. Type X:\Setup.exe, replacing “X” with the  
letter which represents your drive and click OK  
.
• After connecting the printer, click Next  
.
• If you don’t want to connect the printer at this time, click  
Next, and No on the following screen. Then the installation  
will start and a test page will not be printed at the end of the  
installation.  
• The installation window that appears in this User’s  
Guide may differ depending on the printer and  
interface in use.  
5
After the installation is finished, a window asking you to  
print a test page appears. If you choose to print a test  
page, select the checkbox and click Next  
.
Otherwise, just click Next and skip to step 7.  
6
7
If the test page prints out correctly, click Yes.  
3
4
Click Next  
• If necessary, select a language from the drop-down list.  
Select Custom installation. Click Next  
.
If not, click No to reprint it.  
To register yourself as a user of Samsung Printers in order  
to receive information from Samsung, select the checkbox  
and click Finish. You are now sent to the Samsung web  
site.  
.
Otherwise, just click Finish  
.
6
Installing Printer Software in Windows  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5
Select your printer and click Next  
.
6
Select the components to be installed and click Next.  
NOTE: You can change the desired installation folder by  
clicking [Browse].  
NOTE: If your printer is not already connected to the  
computer, the following window will appear.  
7
After the installation is finished, a window asking you to  
print a test page appears. If you choose to print a test  
page, select the checkbox and click Next  
.
Otherwise, just click Next and skip to step 9.  
8
9
If the test page prints out correctly, click Yes.  
If not, click No to reprint it.  
To register yourself as a user of Samsung Printers in order  
to receive information from Samsung, select the checkbox  
and click Finish. You are now sent to the Samsung web  
site.  
Otherwise, just click Finish  
.
• After connecting the printer, click Next  
.
• If you don’t want to connect the printer at this time, click  
Next, and No on the following screen. Then the installation  
will start and a test page will not be printed at the end of the  
installation.  
• The installation window that appears in this User’s  
Guide may differ depending on the printer and  
interface in use.  
7
Installing Printer Software in Windows  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4
Select Typical installation for a network printer. Click  
Next  
Installing Software for Network  
Printing  
.
When you connect your printer to a network, you must first  
configure the TCP/IP settings for the printer. After you have  
assigned and verified the TCP/IP settings, you are ready to  
install the software on each computer on the network.  
You can install the printer software using the typical or custom  
method.  
Typical Installation  
This is recommended for most users. All components necessary  
for printer operations will be installed.  
1
Make sure that the printer is connected to your network  
and powered on. For details about connecting to the  
network, see the supplied printer’s User’s Guide.  
5
The list of printers available on the network appears.  
Select the printer you want to install from the list and then  
2
Insert the supplied CD-ROM into your CD-ROM drive.  
click Next  
.
The CD-ROM should automatically run, and an installation  
window appears.  
If the installation window does not appear, click Start and  
then Run. Type X:\Setup.exe, replacing “  
X” with the  
letter which represents your drive and click OK  
.
• If you do not see your printer on the list, click Update to  
refresh the list, or select Add TCP/IP Port to add your  
printer to the network. To add the printer to the  
network, enter the port name and the IP address for the  
printer.  
3
Click Next  
.
To verify your printer’s IP address or the MAC address,  
print a Network Configuration page.  
• If necessary, select a language from the drop-down list.  
To find a shared network printer (UNC Path), select  
Shared Printer [UNC] and enter the shared name  
manually or find a shared printer by clicking the Browse  
button.  
NOTE: If you cannot find your machine in network, please  
turn off the firewall and click Update  
.
8
Installing Printer Software in Windows  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
6
After the installation is finished, a window appears asking  
you to print a test page and to register yourself as a user  
of Samsung Printers in order to receive information from  
Samsung. If you so desire, select the corresponding  
3
4
Click Next  
.
• If necessary, select a language from the drop-down list.  
Select Custom installation. Click Next  
.
checkbox(es) and click Finish  
.
Otherwise, just click Finish  
.
5
The list of printers available on the network appears.  
Select the printer you want to install from the list and then  
click Next  
.
NOTE: After setup is complete, if your printer driver doesn’t  
work properly, reinstall the printer driver. See “Reinstalling  
Custom Installation  
You can choose individual components to install and set a  
specific IP address.  
1
Make sure that the printer is connected to your network  
and powered on. For details about connecting to the  
network, see the supplied printer’s User’s Guide.  
2
Insert the supplied CD-ROM into your CD-ROM drive.  
The CD-ROM should automatically run, and an installation  
window appears.  
• If you do not see your printer on the list, click Update to  
refresh the list, or select Add TCP/IP Port to add your  
printer to the network. To add the printer to the  
network, enter the port name and the IP address for the  
printer.  
If the installation window does not appear, click Start and  
then Run. Type X:\Setup.exe, replacing “  
X” with the  
letter which represents your drive and click OK  
.
To verify your printer’s IP address or the MAC address,  
print a Network Configuration page.  
To find a shared network printer (UNC Path), select  
Shared Printer [UNC] and enter the shared name  
manually or find a shared printer by clicking the Browse  
button.  
NOTE: If you cannot find your machine in network, please turn  
off the firewall and click Update  
.
9
Installing Printer Software in Windows  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
7
After the installation is finished, a window appears asking  
you to print a test page and to register yourself as a user  
of Samsung Printers in order to receive information from  
Samsung. If you so desire, select the corresponding  
TIP: If you want to set a specific IP address on a specific  
network printer, click the Set IP Address button. The Set IP  
Address window appears. Do as follows:  
checkbox(es) and click Finish  
.
Otherwise, just click Finish  
.
a. Select a printer to be set with a specific IP address from the  
list.  
b. Configure an IP address, subnet mask, and gateway for the  
printer manually and click Configure to set the specific IP  
address for the network printer.  
NOTE: After setup is complete, if your printer driver doesn’t  
work properly, reinstall the printer driver. See “Reinstalling  
c. Click Next  
.
6
Select the components to be installed. After selecting the  
components, the following window appears. You can also  
change the printer name, set the printer to be shared on  
the network, set the printer as the default printer, and  
change the port name of each printer. Click Next  
.
To install this software on a server, select the Setting up  
this printer on a server checkbox.  
10  
Installing Printer Software in Windows  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
NOTE: If your printer is not already connected to the  
computer, the following window will appear.  
Reinstalling Printer Software  
You can reinstall the software if installation fails.  
1
2
Start Windows.  
From the Start menu select Programs or All Programs  
your printer driver name  
Maintenance.  
3
4
Select Repair and click Next  
.
The list of printers available on the network appears.  
Select the printer you want to install from the list and then  
click Next  
.
• After connecting the printer, click Next  
.
• If you don’t want to connect the printer at this time, click  
Next, and No on the following screen. Then the installation  
will start and a test page will not be printed at the end of the  
installation.  
• The reinstallation window that appears in this User’s  
Guide may differ depending on the printer and  
interface in use.  
5
Select the components you want to reinstall and click  
Next  
• If you do not see your printer on the list, click Update to  
refresh the list, or select Add TCP/IP Port to add your  
printer to the network. To add the printer to the  
network, enter the port name and the IP address for the  
printer.  
.
If you installed the printer software for local printing  
and you select your printer driver name, the window  
asking you to print a test page appears. Do as follows:  
a. To print a test page, select the check box and click  
To find a shared network printer (UNC Path), select  
Shared Printer [UNC] and enter the shared name  
manually or find a shared printer by clicking the Browse  
button.  
Next  
.
b. If the test page prints out correctly, click Yes  
.
If it doesn’t, click No to reprint it.  
You will see a component list so that you can reinstall any  
item individually.  
6
When the reinstallation is done, click Finish  
.
11  
Installing Printer Software in Windows  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Removing Printer Software  
1
2
Start Windows.  
From the Start menu select Programs or All Programs  
your printer driver name  
Maintenance.  
3
Select Remove and click Next  
.
You will see a component list so that you can remove any  
item individually.  
4
5
Select the components you want to remove and then click  
Next  
When your computer asks you to confirm your selection,  
click Yes  
.
.
The selected driver and all of its components are removed  
from your computer.  
6
After the software is removed, click Finish.  
12  
Installing Printer Software in Windows  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
1
2
Open the document you want to print.  
Select Print from the File menu. The Print window is  
displayed. It may look slightly different depending on your  
application.  
2
Basic Printing  
This chapter explains the printing options and common printing  
tasks in Windows.  
The basic print settings are selected within the Print  
window. These settings include the number of copies and  
print range.  
This chapter includes:  
Make sure that your  
printer is selected.  
3
4
Select your printer driver from the Name drop-down  
list.  
To take advantage of the printer features provided by your  
printer driver, click Properties or Preferences in the  
application’s Print window. For details, see “Printer  
Printing a Document  
NOTES  
:
If you see Setup Printer, or Options in your Print  
,
window, click it instead. Then click Properties on the next  
screen.  
• Your printer driver Properties window that appears in this  
User’s Guide may differ depending on the printer in use.  
However the composition of the printer properties window is  
similar.  
• Check the Operating System(s) that are compatible  
with your printer. Please refer to the OS Compatibility  
section of Printer Specifications in your Printer User’s  
Guide.  
Click OK to close the printer properties window.  
To start the print job, click OK or Print in the Print  
window.  
• If you need to know the exact name of your printer, you can  
check the supplied CD-ROM.  
Printing to a file (PRN)  
The following procedure describes the general steps required  
for printing from various Windows applications. The exact steps  
for printing a document may vary depending on the application  
program you are using. Refer to the User’s Guide of your  
software application for the exact printing procedure.  
You will sometimes need to save the print data as a file for your  
purpose.  
To create a file:  
1
2
Check the Print to file box at the Print window.  
Select the folder and assign a name of the file and then  
click OK.  
13  
Basic Printing  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Layout Tab  
The Layout tab provides options to adjust how the document  
appears on the printed page. The Layout Options includes  
Printer Settings  
Multiple Pages per Side  
Printing. See “Printing a Document” on page 13 for more  
information on accessing printer properties.  
,
Poster Printing and Booklet  
You can use the printer properties window, which allows you to  
access all of the printer options you need when using your  
printer. When the printer properties are displayed, you can  
review and change the settings needed for your print job.  
Your printer properties window may differ, depending on your  
operating system. This Software User’s Guide shows the  
Properties window for Windows 98.  
Your printer driver Properties window that appears in this  
User’s Guide may differ depending on the printer in use.  
If you access printer properties through the Printers folder, you  
can view additional Windows-based tabs (refer to your  
Windows User’s Guide) and the Printer tab (see “Printer Tab” on  
page 17).  
NOTES  
:
• Most Windows applications will override settings you specify  
in the printer driver. Change all print settings available in the  
software application first, and change any remaining settings  
using the printer driver.  
• The settings you change remain in effect only while you are  
using the current program. To make your changes  
permanent, make them in the Printers folder.  
• The following procedure is for Windows XP. For other  
Windows OS, refer to the corresponding Windows User's  
Guide or online help.  
Paper Orientation  
Paper Orientation allows you to select the direction in which  
information is printed on a page.  
1. Click the Windows Start button.  
Portrait prints across the width of the page, letter style.  
Landscape prints across the length of the page, spreadsheet  
style.  
2. Select Printers and Faxes  
.
3. Select your printer driver icon.  
4. Right-click on the printer driver icon and select  
Rotate allows you to rotate the page the selected degrees.  
Printing Preferences  
.
5. Change the settings on each tab, click OK.  
Landscape  
Portrait  
Layout Options  
Layout Options allows you to select advanced printing options.  
You can choose Multiple Pages per Side and Poster Printing  
.
Double-sided Printing  
Double-sided Printing allows you to print on both sides of  
paper. If this option does not appear, your printer does  
not have this feature.  
14  
Basic Printing  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
First Page  
Paper Tab  
This property allows you to print the first page using a different  
paper type from the rest of the document. You can select the  
paper source for the first page.  
For example, load thick stock for the first page into the Multi-  
purpose Tray, and plain paper into Tray n. Then, select Tray n in  
the Source option and Multi-Purpose Tray in the First Page  
option.  
Use the following options to set the basic paper handling  
specifications when you access the printer properties. See  
“Printing a Document” on page 13 for more information on  
accessing printer properties.  
Click the Paper tab to access various paper properties.  
Scaling Printing  
Scaling Printing allows you to automatically or manually scale  
your print job on a page. You can choose from None  
,
Reduce/  
Enlarge, and Fit to Page  
.
Copies  
Copies allows you to choose the number of copies to be printed.  
You can select 1 to 999 copies.  
Size  
Size allows you to set the size of paper you loaded in the tray.  
If the required size is not listed in the Size box, click Custom  
.
When the Custom Paper Setting window appears, set the paper  
size and click OK. The setting appears in the list so that you can  
select it.  
Source  
Make sure that Source is set to the corresponding paper tray.  
Use Manual Feeder when printing on special materials like  
envelopes and transparencies. You have to load one sheet at a  
time into the Manual Tray or Multi-Purpose Tray.  
If the paper source is set to Auto Selection, the printer  
automatically picks up print material in the following tray order:  
Manual Tray or Multi-Purpose Tray, Tray n.  
Type  
Set Type to correspond to the paper loaded in the tray from  
which you want to print. This will let you get the best quality  
printout. If not, print quality may not be acheived as you want.  
Cotton: 20 lb to 24 lb (75~90 g/m2) cotton paper such as Gilbert  
25 % and Gilbert 100 %.  
Plain Paper: Normal plain paper. Select this type if your printer is  
monochrome and printing on the 16 lb (60 g/m2) cotton paper.  
Recycled Paper: 20 lb to 24 lb (75~90 g/m2) recycled paper.  
15  
Basic Printing  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Advanced Options  
Graphics Tab  
Use the following Graphic options to adjust the print quality for  
your specific printing needs. See “Printing a Document” on  
page 13 for more information on accessing printer properties.  
You can set advanced settings by clicking the Advanced  
Options button.  
TrueType Options: This option determines what the driver  
tells the printer about how to image the text in your document.  
Select the appropriate setting according to the status of your  
document. This option may be available only in  
Windows 9x/Me, depending on your particular printer  
model.  
Click the Graphic tab to display the properties shown below.  
-
Download as Outline: When this option is selected, the  
driver will download any TrueType fonts that are used in your  
document not already stored (resident) on your printer. If,  
after printing a document, you find that the fonts did not print  
correctly, choose Download as bit image and resubmit your  
print job. The Download as bit image setting is often useful  
when printing Adobe. This feature is available only  
when you use the PCL printer driver.  
-
-
Download as Bit Image: When this option is selected, the  
driver will download the font data as bitmap images.  
Documents with complicated fonts, such as Korean or  
Chinese, or various other fonts, will print faster in this setting.  
Print as Graphics: When this option is selected, the driver  
will download any fonts as graphics. When printing documents  
with high graphic content and relatively few TrueType fonts,  
printing performance (speed) may be enhanced in this  
setting.  
Print All Text To Black: When the Print All Text To  
Black option is checked, all text in your document prints solid  
black, regardless of the color it appears on the screen.  
Resolution  
The Resolution options you can select may vary  
depending on your printer model. The higher the setting,  
the sharper the clarity of printed characters and graphics. The  
higher setting also may increase the time it takes to print a  
document.  
Toner Save Mode  
Selecting this option extends the life of your toner cartridge and  
reduces your cost per page without a significant reduction in print  
quality. Some printers do not support this feature.  
Printer Setting: If you select this option, this feature is  
determined by the setting you’ve made on the control panel of  
the printer.  
On: Select this option to allow the printer to use less toner on  
each page.  
Off: If you don’t need to save toner when printing a document,  
select this option.  
16  
Basic Printing  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Use Printer Fonts: When Use Printer Fonts is checked, the  
printer uses the fonts that are stored in its memory (resident  
fonts) to print your document, rather than downloading the  
fonts used in your document. Because downloading fonts takes  
time, selecting this option can speed up your printing time.  
When using Printer fonts, the printer will try to match the fonts  
used in your document to those stored in its memory. If,  
however, you use fonts in your document that are very different  
from those resident in the printer, your printed output will  
appear very different from what it looks like on the screen.  
This feature is available only when you use the PCL  
printer driver.  
Extras Tab  
You can select output options for your document. See “Printing  
a Document” on page 13 for more information about accessing  
the printer properties.  
Click the Extras tab to access the following feature:  
Print and Hold  
Print and Hold dialog allows you to select how to print or save the  
printing file by using the HDD. Some printers do not support  
this feature.  
Using Onscreen Help File  
• For more information about Print and Hold, click  
at  
the top right corner of the window. The Print and Hold  
Help window opens and allows you to view onscreen help  
supplied on the Print and Hold  
.
Watermark  
About Tab  
You can create a background text image to be printed on each  
page of your document. For details, see “Using Watermarks” on  
Use the About tab to display the copyright notice and the  
version number of the driver. If you have an Internet browser,  
you can connect to the Internet by clicking on the web site icon.  
about accessing printer properties.  
Overlay  
Overlays are often used to take the place of preprinted forms and  
letterhead paper. For details, see “Using Overlays” on page 23.  
Output Options  
Printer Tab  
Print Subset: You can set the sequence in which the pages  
If you access printer properties through the Printers folder,  
you can view the Printer tab. You can set the printer  
configuration.  
print. Select the print order from the drop-down list.  
-
-
-
-
Normal (1,2,3): Your printer prints all pages from the first  
page to the last page.  
Reverse All Pages (3,2,1): Your printer prints all pages  
from the last page to the first page.  
Print Odd Pages: Your printer prints only the odd numbered  
pages of the document.  
The following procedure is for Windows XP. For other Windows  
OS, refer to the corresponding Windows User's Guide or online  
help.  
1
2
3
4
Click the Windows Start menu.  
Select Printers and Faxes  
Print Even Pages: Your printer prints only the even  
numbered pages of the document.  
.
Select your printer driver icon.  
-
-
Staple: Do the stapling on the printouts.  
Request Offset: If you want the printouts to be sorted the  
same way as the original, the machine places printout sets  
slightly offset from one another.  
Right-click on the printer driver icon and select  
Properties  
.
5
Click the Printer tab and set the options.  
-
Information Page: Select Information Page to print a cover  
sheet containing the printer name, the network user ID, job  
name before printing the document. When several users send  
a print job to the printer, this option allows you to easily find  
your printing from the output tray.  
17  
Basic Printing  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Using a Favorite Setting  
The Favorites option, which is visible on each properties tab,  
allows you to save the current properties settings for future  
use.  
To save a Favorites item:  
1
2
Change the settings as needed on each tab.  
Enter a name for the item in the Favorites input box.  
3
Click Save.  
When you save Favorites, all current driver settings are  
saved.  
To use a saved setting, select the item from the Favorites drop  
down list. The printer is now set to print according to the  
Favorites setting you selected.  
To delete a Favorites item, select it from the list and click  
Delete  
.
You can also restore the printer driver’s default settings by  
selecting Printer Default from the list.  
Using Help  
Your printer has a help screen that can be activated by clicking  
the Help button in the printer properties window. These help  
screens give detailed information about the printer features  
provided by the printer driver.  
You can also click  
from the upper right corner of the window,  
and then click on any setting.  
18  
Basic Printing  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
3
Advanced Printing  
This chapter explains printing options and advanced printing  
tasks.  
Printing Multiple Pages on One  
Sheet of Paper (N-Up Printing)  
You can select the number of pages to print on a single sheet  
of paper. To print more than one page per sheet, the pages will  
be reduced in size and arranged in the order you specify. You  
can print up to 16 pages on one sheet.  
1
3
2
4
NOTE  
:
• Your printer driver Properties window that appears in this  
User’s Guide may differ depending on the printer in use.  
However the composition of the printer properties window is  
similar.  
• If you need to know the exact name of your printer, you can  
check the supplied CD-ROM.  
1
To change the print settings from your software  
application, access printer properties. See “Printing a  
2
3
From the Layout tab, choose Multiple Pages per Side in  
the Layout Type drop-down list.  
Select the number of pages you want to print per sheet  
(1, 2, 4, 6, 9, or 16) in the Pages per Side drop-down  
list.  
This chapter includes:  
4
Select the page order from the Page Order drop-down  
list, if necessary.  
Check Print Page Border to print a border around each  
page on the sheet.  
Click the Paper tab, select the paper source, size, and  
type.  
5
6
Click OK and print the document.  
19  
Advanced Printing  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Printing Posters  
Printing Booklets  
This feature allows you to print a single-page document onto 4,  
9, or 16 sheets of paper, for the purpose of pasting the sheets  
together to form one poster-size document.  
9
9
8
8
1
To change the print settings from your software  
application, access printer properties. See “Printing a  
This printer feature allows you to print your document on both  
sides of the paper and arranges the pages so that the paper can  
be folded in half after printing to produce a booklet.  
2
3
Click the Layout tab, select Poster Printing in the  
Layout Type drop-down list.  
Configure the poster option:  
1
To change the print settings from your software  
application, access the printer properties. See “Printing a  
You can select the page layout from Poster<2x2>  
,
Poster<3x3> Poster<4x4> or Custom. If you select  
,
2
From the Layout tab, choose Booklet Printing from the  
Type drop-down list.  
Poster<2x2>, the output will be automatically stretched  
to cover 4 physical pages. If the option is set to Custom,  
you can enlarge the original from 150% to 400%.  
Depending on the level of the enlargement, the page  
NOTE: The Booklet Printing option is not available for all  
the paper size. In order to find out the available paper size for  
this feature, select the paper size in the Size option on the  
Paper tab, then check if the Booklet Printing in a Type  
drop-down list on the Layout tab is activated.  
layout is automatically adjusted to Poster<2x2>  
,
Poster<3x3> Poster<4x4>  
,
.
3
Click the Paper tab, and select the paper source, size, and  
type.  
4
5
Click OK and print the document.  
After printing, fold and staple the pages.  
Specify an overlap in millimeters or inches to make it  
easier to pasting the sheets together.  
0.15 inches  
0.15 inches  
4
5
Click the Paper tab, select the paper source, size, and  
type.  
Click OK and print the document. You can complete the  
poster by pasting the sheets together.  
20  
Advanced Printing  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Printing on Both Sides of Paper  
Printing a Reduced or Enlarged  
Document  
You can print on both sides of a sheet of paper. Before printing,  
decide how you want your document oriented.  
You can change the size of a page’s content to appear larger or  
smaller on the printed page.  
The options are:  
Printer Setting, if you select this option, this feature is  
determined by the setting you’ve made on the control  
panel of the printer. If this option does not appear,  
your printer does not have this feature.  
1
To change the print settings from your software  
application, access printer properties. See “Printing a  
2
3
From the Paper tab, select Reduce/Enlarge in the  
Printing Type drop-down list.  
Enter the scaling rate in the Percentage input box.  
None  
Long Edge, which is the conventional layout used in  
book binding.  
You can also click the  
or  
button.  
Short Edge, which is the type often used with calendars.  
4
5
Select the paper source, size, and type in Paper Options.  
2
Click OK and print the document.  
2
3
2
5
3
3
2
5
5
3
5
Fitting Your Document to a  
Selected Paper Size  
Long Edge  
Short Edge  
Reverse Duplex Printing, allows you to select general  
print order compare to duplex print order. If this option  
does not appear, your printer does not have this  
feature.  
This printer feature allows you to scale your print job to any  
selected paper size regardless of the digital document size. This  
can be useful when you want to check fine details on a small  
document.  
A
NOTE: Do not print on both sides of labels, transparencies,  
envelopes, or thick paper. Paper jamming and damage to the  
printer may result.  
1
To change the print settings from your software  
application, access printer properties. See “Printing a  
2
3
From the Paper tab, select Fit to Page in the Printing  
Type drop-down list.  
Select the correct size from the Output size drop-down  
list.  
1
To change the print settings from your software  
application, access printer properties. “Printing a  
2
3
From the Layout tab, select the paper orientation.  
4
5
Select the paper source, size, and type in Paper Options.  
From the Double-sided Printing section, select the  
binding option you want.  
Click OK and print the document.  
4
5
Click the Paper tab and select the paper source, size, and  
type.  
Click OK and print the document.  
NOTE: If your printer does not have a duplex unit, you should  
complete the printing job manually. The printer prints every  
other page of the document first. After printing the first side of  
your job, the Printing Tip window appears. Follow the on-  
screen instructions to complete the printing job.  
21  
Advanced Printing  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
Editing a Watermark  
Using Watermarks  
1
2
3
To change the print settings from your software  
application, access printer properties. See “Printing a  
Click the Extras tab and click the Edit button in the  
Watermark section. The Edit Watermarks window  
appears.  
Select the watermark you want to edit from the Current  
Watermarks list and change the watermark message and  
options.  
The Watermark option allows you to print text over an existing  
document. For example, you may want to have large gray  
letters reading “DRAFT” or “CONFIDENTIAL” printed diagonally  
across the first page or all pages of a document.  
There are several predefined watermarks that come with the  
printer, and they can be modified, or you can add new ones to  
the list.  
4
5
Click Update to save the changes.  
Click OK until you exit the Print window.  
Using an Existing Watermark  
1
2
3
To change the print settings from your software  
application, access printer properties. See “Printing a  
Click the Extras tab, and select the desired watermark  
from the Watermark drop-down list. You will see the  
selected watermark in the preview image.  
Deleting a Watermark  
1
To change the print settings from your software  
application, access printer properties. See “Printing a  
2
From the Extras tab, click the Edit button in the  
Watermark section. The Edit Watermarks window  
appears.  
Click OK and start printing.  
NOTE: The preview image shows how the page will look when  
it is printed.  
3
4
Select the watermark you want to delete from the Current  
Watermarks list and click Delete  
Click OK until you exit the Print window.  
.
Creating a Watermark  
1
2
3
To change the print settings from your software  
application, access printer properties. See “Printing a  
Click the Extras tab, and click the Edit button in the  
Watermark section. The Edit Watermarks window  
appears.  
Enter a text message in the Watermark Message box.  
You can enter up to 40 characters. The message displays  
in the preview window.  
When the First Page Only box is checked, the watermark  
prints on the first page only.  
4
Select watermark options.  
You can select the font name, style, size, or grayscale level  
from the Font Attributes section and set the angle of the  
watermark from the Message Angle section.  
5
6
Click Add to add a new watermark to the list.  
When you have finished editing, click OK and start  
printing.  
To stop printing the watermark, select (No Watermark) from  
the Watermark drop-down list.  
22  
Advanced Printing  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                 
Using a Page Overlay  
After an overlay has been created, it is ready to be printed with  
your document. To print an overlay with a document:  
Using Overlays  
1
2
Create or open the document you want to print.  
What is an Overlay?  
To change the print settings from your software  
application, access printer properties. See “Printing a  
An overlay is text and/or images stored in the computer hard  
disk drive (HDD) as a special file format that can be printed on  
any document. Overlays are often used to take the place of  
preprinted forms and letterhead paper. Rather than using  
preprinted letterhead, you can create an overlay containing the  
exact same information that is currently on your letterhead. To  
print a letter with your company’s letterhead, you do not need  
to load preprinted letterhead paper in the printer. You need only  
tell the printer to print the letterhead overlay on your  
document.  
Dear ABC  
3
4
Click the Extras tab.  
Select the desired overlay from the Overlay drop-down  
list box.  
If the overlay file you want does not appear in the  
Overlay list, click Edit button and Load Overlay, and  
select the overlay file.  
Regards  
WORLD BEST  
5
If you have stored the overlay file you want to use in an  
external source, you can also load the file when you access  
the Load Overlay window.  
Creating a New Page Overlay  
To use a page overlay, you must create a new page overlay  
containing your logo or image.  
After you select the file, click Open. The file appears in the  
Overlay List box and is available for printing. Select the  
overlay from the Overlay List box.  
6
7
If necessary, click Confirm Page Overlay When  
Printing. If this box is checked, a message window  
appears each time you submit a document for printing,  
asking you to confirm your wish to print an overlay on your  
document.  
1
Create or open a document containing text or an image for  
use in a new page overlay. Position the items exactly as  
you wish them to appear when printed as an overlay.  
To save the document as an overlay, access printer  
Click the Extras tab, and click Edit button in the Overlay  
section.  
WORLD BEST  
2
3
If this box is not checked and an overlay has been  
selected, the overlay automatically prints with your  
document.  
4
5
In the Edit Overlay window, click Create Overlay.  
Click OK or Yes until printing begins.  
In the Create Overlay window, type a name of up to eight  
characters in the File name box. Select the destination  
path, if necessary. (The default is C:\Formover).  
The selected overlay downloads with your print job and  
prints on your document.  
6
7
Click Save. The name appears on the Overlay List box.  
NOTE: The resolution of the overlay document must be the  
same as that of the document you will print with the overlay.  
Click OK or Yes to finish creating.  
The file is not printed. Instead it is stored on your  
computer hard disk drive.  
Deleting a Page Overlay  
You can delete page overlays that you no longer use.  
NOTE: The overlay document size must be the same as the  
documents you print with the overlay. Do not create an overlay  
with a watermark.  
1
2
3
In the printer properties window, click the Extras tab.  
Click the Edit button in the Overlay section.  
Select the overlay you want to delete from the Overlay  
List box.  
4
5
6
Click Delete Overlay.  
When a confirming message window appears, click Yes  
.
Click OK until you exit the Print window.  
23  
Advanced Printing  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                 
Advanced  
You can use advanced settings by clicking the Advanced  
button.  
4
Using Windows  
PostScript Driver  
If you want to use the PostScript driver provided with your  
system CD-ROM to print a document.  
PPDs, in combination with the PostScript driver, access printer  
features and allow the computer to communicate with the  
printer. An installation program for the PPDs is provided on the  
supplied software CD-ROM.  
This chapter includes:  
Printer Settings  
You can use the printer properties window, which allows you to  
access all of the printer options you need when using your  
printer. When the printer properties are displayed, you can  
review and change the settings needed for your print job.  
Your printer properties window may differ, depending on your  
operating system. This Software User’s Guide shows the  
Properties window for Windows XP.  
Paper/Output this option allows you to select the size of the  
paper loaded in the tray.  
Graphic this option allows you to adjust the print quality for  
your specific printing needs.  
Document Options this options allow you to set the PostScript  
options or printer features.  
Your printer driver Properties window that appears in this  
User’s Guide may differ depending on the printer in use.  
NOTES  
:
• Most Windows applications will override settings you specify  
in the printer driver. Change all print settings available in the  
software application first, and change any remaining settings  
using the printer driver.  
• The settings you change remain in effect only while you are  
using the current program. To make your changes  
permanent, make them in the Printers folder.  
Using Help  
You can click  
from the upper right corner of the window, and  
then click on any setting.  
• The following procedure is for Windows XP. For other  
Windows OS, refer to the corresponding Windows User's  
Guide or online help.  
1. Click the Windows Start button.  
2. Select Printers and Faxes.  
3. Select your printer driver icon.  
4. Right-click on the printer driver icon and select  
Printing Preferences.  
5. Change the settings on each tab, click OK.  
24  
Using Windows PostScript Driver  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
5
Using Direct Printing  
Utility  
Printing  
There are several ways you can print using Direct Printing  
Utility.  
This chapter explains how to use Direct Printing Utility to print PDF  
files without having to open the files.  
From the Direct Printing Utility  
window  
CAUTION  
• You can not print PDF files that are restricted to print.  
Deactivate the printing restriction feature, and retry  
printing.  
1
From the Start menu select Programs or All Programs  
Direct Printing Utility Direct Printing Utility  
.
Or, double-click the Direct Printing Utility shortcut icon on  
your desk top.  
• You can not print PDF files that are restricted by a password.  
Deactivate the password feature, and retry printing.  
The Direct Printing Utility window opens.  
Select the printer you will use in the Select Printer section  
• Depending on how a PDF file was created, it may not be able  
to be printed using the Direct Printing Utility program.  
2
3
and click Browse  
.
• Depending on the memory size supported by your  
printer, PDF files can not be printed using the Direct  
Printing Utility program. Expand the memory.  
Select the PDF file you will print and click Open  
.
The PDF file is added in the Select Files section.  
Customize the printer settings for your needs. See the  
next column.  
• The Direct Printing Utility program supports PDF version  
1.4 and below. For a higher version, you must open the file  
to print it.  
4
5
Click Print  
.
The selected PDF file is sent to the printer.  
Using the shortcut icon  
Overview Direct Printing Utility  
1
Select the PDF file you will print and by dragging drop it to  
the Direct Printing Utility shortcut icon on your desk top.  
Direct Printing Utility is a program that sends a PDF file directly  
to your printer without having to open the file. It sends data  
through the Windows spooler using the port of the printer  
driver. It only supports PDF format.  
The selected PDF file is sent to the default printer.  
NOTE  
:
If the default printer does not support Direct Printing Utility,  
To installing this program, you should select Custom and put a  
check mark in this program when you install the printer driver.  
the message window alerting you to select the appropriate printer  
opens. Select the appropriate printer in the Select Printer section.  
2
3
Customize the printer settings for your needs.  
Click Print  
The selected PDF file is sent to the printer.  
.
Using the right-click menu  
1
Right-click on the PDF file you will print and select Direct  
Printing  
.
The Direct Printing Utility window opens with the PDF file is  
added.  
2
3
Select the printer you will use.  
Customize the printer settings for your needs. See the  
below part.  
4
Click Print  
.
The selected PDF file is sent to the printer.  
25  
Using Direct Printing Utility  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
6
Sharing the Printer  
Locally  
You can connect the printer directly to a selected computer,  
which is called “host computer,” on the network.  
Setting Up a Host Computer  
1
2
3
4
5
6
Start Windows.  
From the Start menu select Printers and Faxes  
.
Double-click your printer driver icon  
.
From the Printer menu, select Sharing  
.
The following procedure is for Windows XP. For other Windows  
OS, refer to the corresponding Windows User's Guide or online  
help.  
Check the Share this printer box.  
Fill in the Shared Name field, and then click OK  
.
NOTES  
:
• Check the Operating System(s) that are compatible with  
your printer. Please refer to the OS Compatibility section of  
Printer Specifications in your Printer User’s Guide.  
• If you need to know the exact name of your printer, you can  
check the supplied CD-ROM.  
Setting Up a Client Computer  
1
2
Right-click the Windows Start button and select Explorer.  
Select My Network Places and then right-click Search  
for Computers  
.
3
Fill in the IP address of host computer in Computer name  
field, and click Search. (In case host computer requires  
User name and Password, fill in User ID and password  
of host computer account.)  
4
5
6
Double-click Printers and Faxes  
Right-click printer driver icon, select Connect  
Click Yes, if the installation confirm message appears.  
.
.
26  
Sharing the Printer Locally  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
7
Scanning  
Scanning with your machine lets you turn pictures and text into  
digital files on your computer. Then you can fax or e-mail the  
files, display them on your web site or use them to create  
projects that you can print using Samsung SmarThru software  
or the WIA driver.  
Scanning Using Samsung  
SmarThru Office  
Samsung SmarThru Office is the accompanying software for  
your machine. You can use SmarThru Office to scan images  
or documents from local or network scanners.  
This chapter includes:  
Using Samsung SmarThru Office  
Follow these steps to start scanning using the SmarThru  
Office  
:
1
2
3
Make sure that your machine and computer are turned on  
and properly connected to each other.  
NOTES  
:
• Check the Operating System(s) that are compatible  
with your printer. Please refer to the OS Compatibility  
section of Printer Specifications in your Printer User’s  
Guide.  
• You can check your printer name in the supplied CD-  
ROM.  
• The maximum resolution that can be achieved  
depends upon various factors, including computer  
speed, available disk space, memory, the size of the  
image being scanned, and bit depth settings. Thus,  
depending on your system and what you are scanning,  
you may not be able to scan at certain resolutions,  
especially using enhanced dpi.  
Place your photograph or page on the document glass or  
DADF (or ADF).  
Once you have installed Samsung SmarThru Office, you  
will see the SmarThru Office icon on your desktop.  
Double-click the SmarThru Office icon.  
Double-click this icon.  
The SmarThru Office window opens.  
Tool bar  
Working area  
Send to bar  
Tool bar: Allows you to use shortcut icons which activate  
the certain functions such as Scan Search, etc.  
,
27  
Scanning  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
•Working area  
4
Click Scan on the tool bar of SmarThru Office window.  
-
SmarThru Desktop: Created within the standard  
Adjust the scan settings.  
Windows folder My Documents.  
-
Sort on Disk: Files of the folders which are not  
indexed will not be displayed in the Sort on Disk  
section. Sort type are Date, File Types, Latest Used.  
To add a folder for indexing, press Edit menu  
Preferences Index  
.
It may take longer time to show the added file folders  
according to the computer performance and the  
number of added file folders.  
NOTES  
:
To do indexing and searching the PDF format file, you must  
install Adobe Acrobat Reader 7.0.5 or higher.  
• You can use indexing and searching functions using  
SmarThru Office supported by Microsoft Indexing Service.  
This service is supported in Windows 2000 or above, so that  
Windows 98/ Me/ NT 4.0 user can not use these functions.  
Click to start scanning.  
NOTES  
:
• In Windows XP operating system, you can use SmarThru  
Office launcher, which is on the right end of taskbar, to open  
the Scan Setting window easily.  
-
Windows Folders: Allow user to navigate through all  
the user’s files and folders.  
- The right panel: Reflects the content of a selected  
folder.  
Send to bar: Run the corresponding application directly.  
Drag and drop selected files to the appropriate  
application button.  
• In other operating systems beside Windows XP, click the  
SmarThru icon  
to activate the SmarThru Office launcher.  
in the tray area of the windows taskbar  
-
Send by E-mail: To send documents by E-mail while  
working within the SmarThru Office  
.
To send scanned images or documents by e-mail, you  
must have a mail client program, like Outlook Express,  
which has been set up with your e-mail account.  
-
-
Send by FTP: To upload a document file to server  
while working within the SmarThru Office  
.
Send by Fax: To send documents by Local or Network  
fax machine while working within the SmarThru  
Scan Setting lets you use the following services:  
Select Scanner: Select the Local or Network scanner.  
Office  
.
- Local Scan: After scanning with parallel port or USB  
port, you can store the scanned output in image or  
document file.  
- Network Scan: After scanning via network, you can  
store the scanned output in JPEG, TIFF, or pdf file.  
To use network scanner, your computer should install  
the Network Scan Manager and register the scanner  
within that program. Refer to Scanning chapter in  
user's guide.  
Scan Settings: Allows you to customize settings for  
Image type, Resolution, Scan Size, Paper Source.  
Scan To: Allows you to customize settings for File Name,  
File Format, OCR Language.  
5
To start scanning, click Scan.  
NOTE: If you want to cancel the scan job, click Cancel  
.
28  
Scanning  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Uninstalling Samsung SmarThru Office  
Scanning Using the WIA Driver  
NOTE: Before beginning uninstallation, ensure that all  
Your machine also supports the Windows Image Acquisition  
(WIA) driver for scanning images. WIA is one of the standard  
components provided by Microsoft® Windows® XP and works  
with digital cameras and scanners. Unlike the TWAIN driver, the  
WIA driver allows you to scan and easily manipulate images  
without using additional software.  
applications are closed on your computer.  
1
2
From the Start menu, select Programs  
.
Select SmarThru Office, and then select Uninstall  
SmarThru Office  
When your computer asks you to confirm, read the  
statement and click OK  
Click Finish  
.
NOTE: The WIA driver works only on Windows XP with USB  
port.  
3
4
.
.
1
2
Load the document(s) face up into the DADF (or ADF).  
OR  
Place a single document face down on the document  
glass.  
From the Start menu on your desktop window, select  
Using Onscreen Help File  
For more information about SmarThru, click  
corner of the window. The SmarThru Help window opens and  
allows you to view onscreen help supplied on the SmarThru  
program.  
at the top right  
Settings  
,
Control Panel, and then Scanners and  
Cameras  
.
3
4
Double click your scanner driver icon. The Scanner and  
Camera Wizard launches.  
Choose your scanning preferences and click Preview to  
see how your preferences affect the picture.  
5
6
Click Next.  
Scanning Process with TWAIN-  
enabled Software  
Enter a picture name, and select a file format and  
destination to save the picture.  
Follow the on-screen instructions to edit the picture after it  
is copied to your computer.  
7
If you want to scan documents using other software, you will  
need to use TWAIN-compliant software, such as Adobe  
PhotoDeluxe or Adobe Photoshop. The first time you scan with  
your machine, select it as your TWAIN source in the application  
you use.  
NOTE: If you want to cancel the scan job, press the Cancel  
button on the Scanner and Camera Wizard.  
The basic scanning process involves a number of steps:  
1
2
Make sure that your machine and computer are turned on  
and properly connected to each other.  
Load the document(s) face up into the DADF (or ADF).  
OR  
Place a single document face down on the document  
glass.  
3
4
5
Open an application, such as PhotoDeluxe or Photoshop.  
Open the TWAIN window and set the scan options.  
Scan and save your scanned image.  
NOTE: You need to follow the program’s instructions for  
acquiring an image. Please refer to the user’s guide of the  
application.  
29  
Scanning  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
The Smart Panel program displays the current status of the  
printer, various information, lets you change settings and the  
level of toner remaining in the toner cartridge(s).  
8
Using Smart Panel  
Smart Panel is a program that monitors and informs you of the  
status of the printer, and allows you to customize the printer’s  
settings. Smart Panel is installed automatically when you  
install the printer software.  
2
3
NOTES:  
4
1
To use the this program, you need:  
5
- Windows 98 or higher (Windows NT 4.0 can be used only  
for network-supported printers.) To check for Operating  
System(s) that are compatible with your printer, refer to  
Printer Specifications in your Printer User’s Guide.  
- Internet Explorer version 5.0 or higher for flash animation  
in HTML Help.  
• If you need to know the exact name of your printer, you can  
check the supplied CD-ROM.  
1
Toner Level  
You can view the level of toner remaining in the toner  
cartridge(s). The printer and the number of the toner cartridge(s)  
shown above window may differ depending on the printer in use.  
2
Buy Now  
You can order replacement toner cartridge online.  
3
Troubleshooting Guide  
You can view Help to solve problems.  
Understanding Smart Panel  
If an error occurs while printing, Smart Panel appears  
automatically, showing the error. You can also launch Smart  
Panel manually from the Windows task bar. Double-click the  
Smart Panel icon on the Windows task bar.  
4
Printer Setting  
You can configure various printer settings in the Printer Settings  
Utility window.  
NOTES: If you connect your printer to a network, the  
SyncThru Web Service window appears instead of the  
Printer Settings Utility window.  
Double click this icon.  
Or, from the Start menu, select Programs or All Programs  
5
Driver Setting  
your printer driver name  
Smart Panel.  
You can use the printer properties window, which allows you to  
access all of the printer options you need for using your  
NOTES:  
• If you have already installed more than one Samsung  
printer, first select the printer model you want in order to  
use the corresponding Smart Panel. Right-click the Smart  
Panel icon on the Windows task bar and select your printer  
name  
.
Opening the Troubleshooting  
Guide  
• The Smart Panel window and its contents shown in this  
Software User’s Guide may differ depending on the printer in  
use.  
Using the troubleshooting guide, you can view solutions for  
error status problems.  
Right-click the Smart Panel icon on the Windows task bar and  
select Troubleshooting Guide  
.
30  
Using Smart Panel  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Using Printer Settings Utility  
Changing the Smart Panel  
Program Settings  
Using the Printer Settings Utility, you can configure and check  
print settings.  
Right-click the Smart Panel icon on the Windows task bar and  
1
Right-click the Smart Panel icon on the Windows task bar  
select Options  
.
and select Printer Setting  
.
The following window opens.  
2
3
Change the settings.  
To send the changes to the printer, click the Apply button.  
NOTES: If you connect your printer to a network, the  
SyncThru Web Service window appears instead of the  
Printer Settings Utility window.  
Using Onscreen Help File  
For more information about Printer Settings Utility, click  
.
Display when job is finished for network printer: The  
computer shows the Smart Panel popup window or  
balloon when your job is complete. (Only for a network  
supported printer.)  
Display when error occurs during printing: The  
computer shows the Smart Panel popup window or  
balloon when an error occurs during printing.  
Display with: You can select how the computer shows  
you a message. If you select Popup window (smart  
panel), the message appears in the Smart Panel pop  
window.  
Launch Job Monitor when the job is saved in the  
printer: If you store print jobs on the printer’s hard disk,  
the computer opens the Job Monitor window. (Only for a  
network supported printer with a built-in hard disk.)  
Schedule an automatic status checking every: The  
computer updates the printer status regularly. Setting the  
value close to 1 second causes the computer to check the  
printer status more frequently, thereby allowing a faster  
response to any printer error.  
31  
Using Smart Panel  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
9
Using Your Printer in  
Linux  
Installing the Unified Linux  
Driver  
You can use your machine in a Linux environment.  
Installing the Unified Linux Driver  
1
Make sure that you connect your machine to your  
computer. Turn both the computer and the machine on.  
When the Administrator Login window appears, type in  
root in the Login field and enter the system password.  
This chapter includes:  
2
NOTE: You must log in as a super user (root) to install the  
printer software. If you are not a super user, ask your system  
administrator.  
3
Insert the printer software CD-ROM. The CD-ROM will  
automatically run.  
If the CD-ROM does not automatically run, click the  
icon at the bottom of the desktop. When the Terminal  
screen appears, type in:  
Getting Started  
The supplied CD-ROM provides you with Samsung’s Unified  
Linux Driver package for using your machine with a Linux  
computer.  
If the CD-ROM is secondary master and the location to  
mount is /mnt/cdrom,  
[root@localhost root]#mount -t iso9660 /dev/hdc /mnt/  
cdrom  
Samsung’s Unified Linux Driver package contains printer and  
scanner drivers, providing the ability to print documents and  
scan images. The package also delivers powerful applications  
for configuring your machine and further processing of the  
scanned documents.  
[root@localhost root]#cd /mnt/cdrom/Linux  
[root@localhost root]#./install.sh  
After the driver is installed on your Linux system, the driver  
package allows you to monitor a number of machine devices via  
fast ECP parallel ports and USB simultaneously.  
NOTE: The installation program runs automatically if you  
have an autorun software package installed and configured.  
The acquired documents can then be edited, printed on the  
same local or network machine devices, sent by e-mail,  
uploaded to an FTP site, or transferred to an external OCR  
system.  
4
When the welcome screen appears, click Next.  
The Unified Linux Driver package is supplied with a smart and  
flexible installation program. You don't need to search for  
additional components that might be necessary for the Unified  
Linux Driver software: all required packages will be carried onto  
your system and installed automatically; this is possible on a  
wide set of the most popular Linux clones.  
32  
Using Your Printer in Linux  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
5
When the installation is complete, click Finish.  
Uninstalling the Unified Linux Driver  
1
When the Administrator Login window appears, type in  
root in the Login field and enter the system password.  
NOTE: You must log in as a super user (root) to install the  
printer software. If you are not a super user, ask your system  
administrator.  
2
Insert the printer software CD-ROM. The CD-ROM will  
automatically run.  
If the CD-ROM does not automatically run, click the  
icon at the bottom of the desktop. When the Terminal  
screen appears, type in:  
If the CD-ROM is secondary master and the location to  
mount is /mnt/cdrom,  
The installation program has added the Unified Driver  
Configurator desktop icon and Samsung Unified Driver  
group to the system menu for your convenience. If you  
have any difficulties, consult the onscreen help that is  
available through your system menu or can otherwise be  
called from the driver package windows applications,  
such as Unified Driver Configurator or Image  
[root@localhost root]#mount -t iso9660 /dev/hdc /mnt/  
cdrom  
[root@localhost root]#cd /mnt/cdrom/Linux  
[root@localhost root]#./uninstall.sh  
Manager  
.
NOTE: The installation program runs automatically if you  
have an autorun software package installed and configured.  
3
4
Click Uninstall  
Click Next  
.
.
5
Click Finish.  
33  
Using Your Printer in Linux  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Printers Configuration  
Printers configuration has the two tabs: Printers and Classes  
.
Using the Unified Driver  
Configurator  
Printers Tab  
You can see the current system’s printer configuration by  
clicking on the printer icon button on the left side of the Unified  
Driver Configurator window.  
Unified Linux Driver Configurator is a tool primarily intended for  
configuring Printer or MFP devices. Since an MFP device  
combines the printer and scanner, the Unified Linux Driver  
Configurator provides options logically grouped for printer and  
scanner functions. There is also a special MFP port option  
responsible for the regulation of access to an MFP printer and  
scanner via a single I/O channel.  
Switches to Printer  
configuration.  
After installing the Unified Linux driver, the Unified Linux Driver  
Configurator icon will automatically be created on your desktop.  
Shows all of the  
installed printer.  
Opening the Unified Driver  
Configurator  
Shows the status,  
model name and  
URI of your printer.  
1
Double-click Unified Driver Configurator on the  
desktop.  
You can also click the Startup Menu icon and select  
Samsung Unified Driver and then Unified Driver  
Configurator  
Press each button on the Modules pane to switch to the  
corresponding configuration window.  
.
You can use the following printer control buttons:  
2
Refresh: renews the available printers list.  
Add Printer: allows you to add a new printer.  
Remove Printer: removes the selected printer.  
Printers Configuration button  
Set as Default: sets the current printer as a default  
printer.  
Scanners Configuration button  
Ports Configuration button  
Stop/Start: stops/starts the printer.  
Test: allows you to print a test page to check if the  
machine is working properly.  
Properties: allows you to view and change the printer  
properties. For details, see page 36.  
You can use the onscreen help by clicking Help  
After changing the configurations, click Exit to close the  
Unified Driver Configurator.  
.
3
34  
Using Your Printer in Linux  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Classes Tab  
The Classes tab shows a list of available printer classes.  
Ports Configuration  
In this window, you can view the list of available ports, check  
the status of each port and release a port that is stalled in busy  
state when its owner is terminated for any reason.  
Shows all of the  
printer classes.  
Switches to  
ports  
configuration.  
Shows all of the  
available ports.  
Shows the status of the  
class and the number of  
printers in the class.  
Shows the port type,  
device connected to  
the port and status  
Refresh : Renews the classes list.  
Add Class... : Allows you to add a new printer class.  
Remove Class : Removes the selected printer class.  
Refresh : Renews the available ports list.  
Release port : Releases the selected port.  
Sharing Ports Between Printers and Scanners  
Scanners Configuration  
In this window, you can monitor the activity of scanner devices,  
view a list of installed Samsung MFP devices, change device  
properties, and scan images.  
Your machine may be connected to a host computer via the  
parallel port or USB port. Since the MFP device contains more  
than one device (printer and scanner), it is necessary to  
organize proper access of “consumer” applications to these  
devices via the single I/O port.  
The Samsung Unified Linux Driver package provides an  
appropriate port sharing mechanism that is used by Samsung  
printer and scanner drivers. The drivers address their devices  
via so-called MFP ports. The current status of any MFP port can  
be viewed via the Ports Configuration. The port sharing  
prevents you from accessing one functional block of the MFP  
device, while another block is in use.  
Switches to  
Scanners  
configuration.  
Shows all of the  
installed scanners.  
When you install a new MFP device onto your system, it is  
strongly recommended you do this with the assistance of an  
Unified Driver Configurator. In this case you will be asked to  
choose I/O port for the new device. This choice will provide the  
most suitable configuration for MFP’s functionality. For MFP  
scanners I/O ports are being chosen by scanner drivers  
automatically, so proper settings are applied by default.  
Shows the vendor,  
model name and type  
of your scanner.  
Properties... : Allows you to change the scan properties  
Drivers... : Allows you to monitor the activity of the scan drivers.  
35  
Using Your Printer in Linux  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Configuring Printer Properties  
Printing a Document  
Using the properties window provided by the Printers  
configuration, you can change the various properties for your  
machine as a printer.  
Printing from Applications  
There are a lot of Linux applications that you are allowed to  
print from using Common UNIX Printing System (CUPS). You  
can print on your machine from any such application.  
1
Open the Unified Driver Configurator.  
If necessary, switch to Printers configuration.  
Select your machine on the available printers list and click  
2
3
1
From the application you are using, select Print from the  
File menu.  
Properties  
.
The Printer Properties window opens.  
2
3
Select Print directly using lpr  
In the LPR GUI window, select the model name of your  
machine from the Printer list and click Properties  
.
.
Click.  
The following five tabs display at the top of the window:  
General: allows you to change the printer location and  
name. The name entered in this tab displays on the  
printer list in Printers configuration.  
Connection: allows you to view or select another port. If  
you change the printer port from USB to parallel or vice  
versa while in use, you must re-configure the printer port  
in this tab.  
4
Change the printer and print job properties.  
Driver: allows you to view or select another printer  
driver. By clicking Options, you can set the default  
device options.  
Jobs: shows the list of print jobs. Click Cancel job to  
cancel the selected job and select the Show completed  
jobs check box to see previous jobs on the job list.  
Classes: shows the class that your printer is in. Click  
Add to Class to add your printer to a specific class or  
click Remove from Class to remove the printer from the  
selected class.  
4
Click OK to apply the changes and close the Printer  
Properties Window.  
36  
Using Your Printer in Linux  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
The following four tabs display at the top of the window.  
General - allows you to change the paper size, the paper  
type, and the orientation of the documents, enables the  
duplex feature, adds start and end banners, and changes  
the number of pages per sheet.  
Scanning a Document  
You can scan a document using the Unified Driver Configurator  
window.  
Text - allows you to specify the page margins and set the  
1
Double-click the Unified Driver Configurator on your  
desktop.  
text options, such as spacing or columns.  
Graphics - allows you to set image options that are used  
when printing images/files, such as color options, image  
size, or image position.  
2
3
Click the  
button to switch to Scanners Configuration.  
Select the scanner on the list.  
Device: allows you to set the print resolution, paper  
source, and destination.  
5
Click Apply to apply the changes and close the Properties  
window.  
6
7
Click OK in the LPR GUI window to start printing.  
The Printing window appears, allowing you to monitor the  
status of your print job.  
Click your  
scanner.  
To abort the current job, click Cancel  
.
Printing Files  
You can print many different types of files on the Samsung  
machine device using the standard CUPS way - directly from  
the command line interface. The CUPS lpr utility allows you do  
that. But the drivers package replaces the standard lpr tool by  
a much more user-friendly LPR GUI program.  
To print any document file:  
1
Type lpr <file_name> from the Linux shell command  
line and press Enter. The LPR GUI window appears.  
When you have only one MFP device and it is connected  
to the computer and turned on, your scanner appears on  
the list and is automatically selected.  
When you type only lpr and press Enter, the Select  
file(s) to print window appears first. Just select any files  
If you have two or more scanners attached to your  
computer, you can select any scanner to work at any  
time. For example, while acquisition is in progress on the  
first scanner, you may select the second scanner, set the  
device options and start the image acquisition  
simultaneously.  
you want to print and click Open  
In the LPR GUI window, select your printer from the list,  
and change the printer and print job properties.  
.
2
3
For details about the properties window, see page 36.  
Click OK to start printing.  
4
5
Click Properties.  
Load the document to be scanned face up into the ADF  
(Automatic Document Feeder) or face down on the  
document glass.  
6
Click Preview in the Scanner Properties window.  
37  
Using Your Printer in Linux  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
The document is scanned and the image preview appears  
in the Preview Pane.  
10When you are finished, click Save on the toolbar.  
11Select the file directory where you want to save the image  
and enter the file name.  
12Click Save.  
Adding Job Type Settings  
You can save your scan option settings to retrieve for a later  
scanning.  
To save a new Job Type setting:  
1
2
3
4
Change the options from the Scanner Properties window.  
Click Save As  
Enter the name for your setting.  
Click OK  
Drag the pointer to  
set the image area  
to be scanned.  
.
.
Your setting is added to the Saved Settings drop-down  
list.  
To save a Job Type setting for the next scan job:  
1
Select the setting you want to use from the Job Type drop-  
down list.  
7
Change the scan options in the Image Quality and Scan  
Area sections.  
2
The next time you open the Scanner Properties window,  
the saved setting is automatically selected for the scan  
job.  
Image Quality: allows you to select the color  
composition and the scan resolution for the image.  
To delete a Job Type setting:  
1
Scan Area: allows you to select the page size. The  
Advanced button enables you to set the page size  
manually.  
Select the setting you want to delete from the Job Type  
drop-down list.  
2
Click Delete  
.
If you want to use one of the preset scan option settings,  
select from the Job Type drop-down list. For details about  
the preset Job Type settings, see page 38.  
The setting is deleted from the list  
You can restore the default setting for the scan options  
Using the Image Manager  
The Image Manager application provides you with menu  
commands and tools to edit your scanned image.  
by clicking Default  
.
8
9
When you have finished, click Scan to start scanning.  
The status bar appears on the bottom left of the window  
to show you the progress of the scan. To cancel scanning,  
click Cancel  
.
The scanned image appears in the new Image Manager  
tab.  
Use these tools to  
edit the image.  
If you want to edit the scanned image, use the toolbar.  
For further details about editing an image, see page 38.  
38  
Using Your Printer in Linux  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
You can use the following tools to edit the image:  
Tools Function  
Saves the image.  
Cancels your last action.  
Restores the action you canceled.  
Allows you to scroll through the image.  
Crops the selected image area.  
Zooms the image out.  
Zooms the image in.  
Allows you to scale the image size; you can  
enter the size manually, or set the rate to  
scale proportionally, vertically, or  
horizontally.  
Allows you to rotate the image; you can  
select the number of degrees from the drop-  
down list.  
Allows you to flip the image vertically or  
horizontally.  
Allows you to adjust the brightness or  
contrast of the image, or to invert the  
image.  
Shows the properties of the image.  
For further details about the Image Manager application, refer  
to the onscreen help.  
39  
Using Your Printer in Linux  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1
0
Using Your Printer with  
a Macintosh  
Your machine supports Macintosh systems with a built-in USB  
interface or a 10/100 Base-TX network interface card. When  
you print a file from a Macintosh computer, you can use the  
PostScript driver by installing the PPD file.  
Installing Software  
The PostScript driver CD-ROM that came with your machine  
provides you with the PPD file to use the PS driver, Apple  
LaserWriter driver, for printing on a Macintosh computer.  
Also, it provides you with the Twain driver for scanning on a  
Macintosh computer.  
Printer driver  
NOTE: Some printers do not support a network  
interface. Make sure that your printer supports a  
network interface by referring to Printer Specifications  
in your Printer User’s Guide.  
Installing the printer driver  
1
Connect your machine to the computer using the USB  
cable or the Ethernet cable.  
This chapter includes:  
2
3
Turn on your computer and the machine.  
Insert the PostScript driver CD-ROM which came with your  
machine into the CD-ROM drive.  
Double-click the Samsung_MFP on your Macintosh  
desktop.  
4
5
6
Double-click the MAC_Printer folder.  
For Mac OS 10.3 or higher, double-click the  
Samsung_MFP Installer OSX icon.  
7
8
9
Click Continue  
Click Install  
After the installation is finished, click Quit  
.
.
.
Uninstalling the printer driver  
1
2
3
Insert the CD-ROM which came with your printer into the  
CD-ROM drive.  
Double-click CD-ROM icon that appears on your  
Macintosh desktop.  
Double-click the Samsung_MFP on your Macintosh  
desktop.  
4
5
Double-click the MAC_Printer folder.  
For Mac OS 10.3 or higher, double-click the  
Samsung_MFP Installer OSX icon.  
6
7
8
Select Uninstall and then click Uninstall  
Click Continue  
When the uninstallation is done, click Quit  
.
.
.
40  
Using Your Printer with a Macintosh  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Scan driver  
Setting Up the Printer  
Installing the Scan driver  
Set up for your printer will be different depending on which  
cable you use to connect the printer to your computer—the  
network cable or the USB cable.  
1
2
3
4
Make sure that you connect your printer to the computer.  
Turn on your computer and printer.  
Insert the CD-ROM which came with your printer into the  
CD-ROM drive.  
Double-click CD-ROM icon that appears on your  
Macintosh desktop.  
For a Network-connected  
Double-click the Samsung_MFP on your Macintosh  
desktop.  
NOTE Some printers do not support a network  
:
interface. Before connecting your printer, make sure  
that your printer supports a network interface by  
referring to Printer Specifications in your Printer User’s  
Guide.  
5
6
7
8
9
Double-click the MAC_Installer folder.  
Double-click the MAC_Twain folder.  
Double-click the Samsung ScanThru Installer icon.  
Enter the password and click OK  
Click Continue  
.
.
Mac OS 10.3 or higher  
10Click Install.  
11Click Continue.  
12After the installation is finished, click Quit.  
1
2
Follow the instructions on “Installing Software” on page 40  
to install the PPD file on your computer.  
Open Print Center or Printer Setup Utility from the  
Utilities folder.  
Uninstalling the Scan driver  
3
4
Click Add on the Printer List.  
1
2
3
Insert the CD-ROM which came with your printer into the  
CD-ROM drive.  
Double-click CD-ROM icon that appears on your  
Macintosh desktop.  
Double-click the Samsung_MFP on your Macintosh  
desktop.  
Select the AppleTalk tab.  
The name of your machine appears on the list. Select  
SEC000xxxxxxxxx from the printer box, where the  
xxxxxxxxx varies depending on your machine.  
5
6
Click Add  
If Auto Select does not work properly, select Samsung in  
Printer Model and your printer name in Model Name  
.
4
5
6
7
8
9
Double-click the MAC_Installer folder.  
.
Double-click the MAC_Twain folder.  
Your machine appears on the Printer List and is set as the  
default printer.  
Double-click the Samsung ScanThru Installer icon.  
Enter the password and click OK  
Click Continue  
Select Uninstall from the Installation Type and then Click  
Uninstall  
.
.
For a USB-connected  
.
Mac OS 10.3 or higher  
10Click Continue.  
11When the uninstallation is done, click Quit.  
1
2
Follow the instructions on “Installing Software” on page 40  
to install the PPD file on your computer.  
Open Print Center or Printer Setup Utility from the  
Utilities folder.  
3
4
5
6
Click Add on the Printer List.  
Select the USB tab.  
Select your printer name and click Add  
.
If Auto Select does not work properly, select Samsung in  
Printer Model and your printer name in Model Name  
.
Your machine appears on the Printer List and is set as the  
default printer.  
41  
Using Your Printer with a Macintosh  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Changing Printer Settings  
You can use advanced printing features when using your  
printer.  
Printing  
From your Macintosh application, select Print from the File  
menu. The printer name which appears in the printer properties  
window may differ depending on the printer in use. Except for  
the name, the composition of the printer properties window is  
similar.  
NOTES  
:
• The Macintosh printer’s properties window that appears in  
this User’s Guide may differ depending on the printer in use.  
However the composition of the printer properties window is  
similar.  
• You can check your printer name in the supplied CD-  
ROM.  
Layout Setting  
The Layout tab provides options to adjust how the document  
appears on the printed page. You can print multiple pages on  
one sheet of paper.  
Select Layout from the Presets drop-down list to access the  
following features. For details, see “Printing Multiple Pages on  
One Sheet of Paper” on the next column.  
Printing a Document  
When you print with a Macintosh, you need to check the printer  
software setting in each application you use. Follow these steps  
to print from a Macintosh.  
1
2
3
Open a Macintosh application and select the file you want  
to print.  
Open the File menu and click Page Setup (Document  
Setup in some applications).  
Choose your paper size, orientation, scaling, and other  
options and click OK  
.
Make sure that your  
printer is selected.  
Mac OS 10.3  
Mac OS 10.3  
4
5
Open the File menu and click Print.  
Choose the number of copies you want and indicate which  
pages you want to print.  
6
Click Print when you finish setting the options.  
42  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
Printer Features Setting  
The Printer Features tab provides options for selecting the  
paper type and adjusting print quality.  
Printing Multiple Pages on One Sheet  
of Paper  
You can print more than one page on a single sheet of paper.  
This feature provides a cost-effective way to print draft pages.  
Select Printer Features from the Presets drop-down list to  
access the following features:  
1
2
From your Macintosh application, select Print from the  
File menu.  
Select Layout  
.
Mac OS 10.3  
Fit to Page  
This printer feature allows you to scale your print job to any  
selected paper size regardless of the digital document size. This  
can be useful when you want to check fine details on a small  
document.  
Paper Type  
Set Type to correspond to the paper loaded in the tray from  
which you want to print. This will let you get the best quality  
printout. If you load a different type of print material, select the  
corresponding paper type.  
Mac OS 10.3  
Resolution(Quality)  
The Resolution options you can select may vary  
depending on your printer model. You can select the  
printing resolution. The higher the setting, the sharper the clarity  
of printed characters and graphics. The higher setting also may  
increase the time it takes to print a document.  
3
4
Select the number of pages you want to print on one sheet  
of paper on the Pages per Sheet drop-down list.  
Select the page order from the Layout Direction option.  
To print a border around each page on the sheet, select  
the option you want from the Border drop-down list.  
5
Click Print, and the printer prints the selected number of  
pages on one side of each page.  
43  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Duplex Printing  
You can print on both sides of the paper. Before printing in the  
duplex mode, decide on which edge you will be binding your  
finished document. The binding options are:  
Scanning  
If you want to scan documents using other software, you will  
need to use TWAIN-compliant software, such as Adobe  
PhotoDeluxe or Adobe Photoshop. The first time you scan with  
your machine, select it as your TWAIN source in the application  
you use.  
Long-Edge Binding: Which is the conventional layout  
used in book binding.  
Short-Edge Binding: Which is the type often used with  
The basic scanning process involves a number of steps:  
calendars.  
• Place your photograph or page on the document glass or  
ADF.  
1
2
From your Macintosh application, select Print from the  
File menu.  
• Open an application, such as PhotoDeluxe or Photoshop.  
• Open the TWAIN window and set the scan options.  
• Scan and save your scanned image.  
Select the Layout  
.
NOTE: You need to follow the program’s instructions for  
acquiring an image. Please refer to the User’s Guide of the  
application.  
Mac OS 10.3  
3
Select a binding orientation from Two Sided Printing  
option.  
4
Click Print and the printer prints on both sides of the  
paper.  
CAUTION If you have selected duplex printing and  
:
then try to print multiple copies of a document, the  
printer may not print the document in the way you  
want. In case of "Collated copy" , if your document has  
odd pages, the last page of the first copy and the first  
page of the next copy will be printed on the front and  
back of one sheet. In case of "Uncollated copy", the  
same page will be printed on the front and back of one  
sheet. Therefore, if you need multiple copies of a  
document and you want those copies on both sides of  
the paper, you must print them one at a time, as  
separate print jobs  
.
44  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
SOFTWARE SECTION  
INDEX  
paper tray, set  
copy 25  
paper type, set  
Macintosh 43  
print 37  
poster, print 20  
PostScript driver  
installing 24  
print  
A
L
advanced printing, use 19  
Layout properties, set  
Macintosh 42  
Windows 14  
B
Linux  
driver, install 32  
printer properties 36  
printing 36  
booklet printing 20  
scanning 37  
C
document 13  
fit to page 21  
from Macintosh 42  
from Windows 13  
N-up  
Macintosh 43  
Windows 19  
overlay 23  
canceling  
scan 29  
M
Macintosh  
driver  
D
install 40  
printing 42  
document, print  
Macintosh 42  
scanning 44  
setting up the printer 41  
MFP driver, install  
Linux 32  
poster 22  
PRN 13  
scaling 21  
Windows 13  
double-sided printing 21  
watermark 22  
print resolution 37  
printer driver, install  
Linux 32  
printer properties  
Linux 36  
printer properties, set  
Macintosh 42  
Windows 14, 24  
printer resolution, set  
Macintosh 43  
Windows 16  
printer software  
install  
Macintosh 40  
Windows  
uninstall  
Windows 12  
printing  
E
Extras properties, set 17  
N
n-up printing  
Macintosh 43  
Windows 19  
F
favorites settings, use 18  
O
G
orientation, print 37  
Windows 14  
overlay  
Graphics properties, set 16  
create 23  
delete 23  
print 23  
H
help, use 18, 24  
I
install  
P
booklets 20  
double-sided 21  
from Linux 36  
Paper properties, set 15  
paper size, set 15  
print 37  
printer driver  
Macintosh 40  
Windows  
paper source, set 37  
Windows 15  
installing  
Linux software 32  
45  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
R
resolution  
printing 37  
S
scanning  
Linux 37  
SmarThru 27  
TWAIN 29  
WIA driver 29  
scanning from Macintosh 44  
setting  
darkness 16  
favorites 18  
image mode 16  
resolution  
Macintosh 43  
Windows 16  
toner save 16  
true-type option 16  
software  
install  
Macintosh 40  
Windows  
reinstall  
Windows 11  
system requirements  
Macintosh 40  
uninstall  
Windows 12  
status monitor, use 30  
T
toner save, set 16  
TWAIN, scan 29  
U
uninstall, software  
Windows 12  
uninstalling  
MFP driver  
Linux 33  
W
watermark  
create 22  
delete 22  
edit 22  
print 22  
WIA, scan 29  
46  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Rev. 2.00  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  

Radica Games Video Game Console 76037 User Guide
Radio Shack Car Video System PTC20LD User Guide
Radio Shack Postal Equipment PS100 User Guide
Raritan Computer Security Camera DSX 0N E User Guide
Remington Styling Iron S 1004 User Guide
Ricoh All in One Printer Type 2018 User Guide
Rolls Car Stereo System DB24 User Guide
Samsung Microwave Oven M1817N User Guide
Samsung Network Card SWL 4000AP User Guide
Samsung Projector BP59 00134H 01 User Guide